Quarterlytics / Communication Services / Specialty Business Services / Wincanton

Wincanton

win · LSE Communication Services
Claim this profile
Ticker win
Exchange LSE
Sector Communication Services
Industry Specialty Business Services
Employees 10,000+
← All annual reports
FY2018 Annual Report · Wincanton
Sign in to download
Loading PDF…
Delivering innovation now 
Driving next generation thinking
Annual Report and Accounts 2018

Contents

INSIDE THIS REPORT

The Group has made 
good progress against its 
strategic objectives as it 
adds capability to meet 
the changing needs of 
our customers
Adrian Colman Chief Executive

OUR BUSINESS  
INDUSTRIAL & TRANSPORT  p6

CHIEF EXECUTIVE’S  
STATEMENT  p12

OUR BUSINESS  
RETAIL & CONSUMER  p4

BUSINESS  
MODEL  p8

CORPORATE RESPONSIBILITY 
REPORT  p20

STRATEGIC REPORT
Introduction  
Financial highlights 
Interim Chairman’s review 
Retail & Consumer 
Industrial & Transport 
Business model 
Our strategy 
How we measure performance 
Chief Executive’s statement 
Delivering innovation now 
Driving next generation thinking 
Corporate responsibility report 
Financial review 
Risk report 

1
2
3
4
6
8
10
11
12
16
18
20
24
28

GOVERNANCE
The Board 
Interim Chairman’s introduction 
Corporate Governance report 
Nomination Committee report 
Audit Committee report 

DIRECTORS’ REMUNERATION REPORT
Committee Chairman’s  
Annual Statement 
Annual Report on Remuneration 
Directors’ Remuneration Policy 

DIRECTORS’ REPORT
Directors’ report 
Statement of Directors’ responsibilities 

INDEPENDENT AUDITOR’S REPORT
Independent auditor’s report 

32
34
36
39
40

43
44
52

59
60

62

68

69
70

ACCOUNTS
Consolidated income statement 
Consolidated statement  
of comprehensive income 
Consolidated balance sheet 
Consolidated statement  
of changes in equity 
Consolidated statement of cash flows 
Notes to the consolidated  
financial statements  
73
Wincanton plc Company balance sheet  100
Wincanton plc Company statement 
of changes in equity 
Notes to the Wincanton plc  
Company financial statements 
Group five year record 
Shareholder information 
Directors and advisers 

102
104
105
106

71
72

101

Strategic report

INTRODUCTION

Every day, Wincanton provides the vital services that help 
businesses thrive. 

We manage orders, make deliveries and assemble goods 
in consumers’ homes... we integrate warehousing and 
transport, getting the best out of our assets and those 
of our customers... we’re responsible for storing, picking 
and delivering every product you can imagine, as well as 
many that you probably can’t... and we do it all effectively, 
efficiently and with a rare mix of high quality service and 
the latest technology.

During our history, we’ve seen changing consumer 
expectations transform our industry. ‘Next week’ has 
become ‘next day’ has become ‘next few hours’. And,  
as our eFulfilment capability continues to develop, it’s only  
a matter of time before ‘now’ becomes the new norm.  
But whatever the future brings, we’ll deliver innovation  
now while driving next generation thinking.

Delivering 
innovation now

Driving next 
generation thinking

FOR MORE INFORMATION SEE PAGE 16

FOR MORE INFORMATION SEE PAGE 18

1

Strategic reportGovernanceDirectors’ remuneration reportDirectors’ reportIndependent auditor’s reportAccountsWincanton plc Annual Report and Accounts 2018FINANCIAL HIGHLIGHTS

We delivered strong organic growth 
in the period and made good 
progress against our strategy.

Stewart Oades 
Interim Chairman

Revenue 

 £1,171.9m
 +4.8%

Net debt1 

 £29.5m
 +21.4%

 £52.9m
 +1.5%

Operating profit

 £44.4m
 -20.7%

Underlying earnings per share1 

Basic earnings per share

 30.8p
 +11.2%

 25.2p
 -26.3%

 4.5%
 -20bps

Operating profit margin 

 3.8%
 -120bps

Dividend per share

 9.9p
 +8.8% 

Underlying operating profit1

Underlying operating profit margin1

FOR CHIEF EXECUTIVE’S STATEMENT SEE PAGE 12

1  See page 27 for further information on the Alternative Performance Measures (APMs), including definitions and a reconciliation of APMs to statutory measures.

2

Strategic reportWincanton plc Annual Report and Accounts 2018INTERIM CHAIRMAN’S REVIEW

INTRODUCTION
We have delivered a solid performance this 
year with the Group remaining focused on 
driving long term organic growth from the 
logistics sectors in which it has chosen to focus. 

During the year Wincanton has materially 
enhanced its eFulfilment logistics offering 
to ensure it brings cutting edge capability 
to this growing channel to market. We have 
successfully grown our two-man home 
delivery services where we enjoy a market 
leading position. In more traditional sectors, 
the Group continues to innovate its services 
such as the Construction sector where it has 
invested in the development of on-site logistics 
services to enhance the control and flow of 
materials into major build programmes for 
customers. This area of investment, coupled 
with good coverage across most of the major 
elements of the UK and Ireland’s physical 
goods economy and combined with a diverse 
customer portfolio means that the business 
provides a reliable and predictable revenue and 
earnings stream generating cash and returns 
for all our stakeholders.

RESULTS
The Group delivered strong revenue growth in 
the year of approximately 5%, taking revenue to 
a six year high of £1,171.9m. This was delivered 
from a combination of organic growth from 
existing customers with cross selling of 
other services and the on-boarding of new 
customers to the Group. Underlying earnings 
per share was up by 11.2% over the prior year  
to 30.8p and by 131.6% over a five year period.

Our cash generation remains strong enabling 
us to invest in our organic growth strategy 
as well as satisfying the needs of our other 
material stakeholders in the Group such as our 
pension scheme and our shareholders. 

PEOPLE AND THE BOARD
Very sadly, the Group’s Chairman, Steve Marshall, 
passed away unexpectedly in September and 
I have taken on the role of Interim Chairman 

whilst the Board conducts a search for a 
permanent Chairman. An appointment is 
expected to be made by late summer.

In September 2017 Gill Barr joined the Board 
as a Non-executive Director. Her background 
in retail and technology businesses as well as 
her broad marketing experience is a strong 
addition to the Board. 

I would like to personally thank the Group’s 
17,700 employees for their contribution to the 
progress made and the results delivered during 
the year. Their commitment, focus and hard 
work is the cornerstone of what drives our 
strong reputation for operational delivery,  
a safe working environment and the delivery  
of excellent results throughout the year. 

We published our first gender pay report in 
March and were pleased to report a median 
gender pay gap below the national average 
at 7%. Wincanton is committed to ensuring 
colleagues in similar roles are paid equitably 
and we are committed to narrowing the 
gender pay gap through increasing the 
proportion of women in certain roles that 
attract higher pay such as HGV drivers. 
We were also delighted that during the year 
three of our colleagues were shortlisted for the 
Everywoman in Transport & Logistics awards to 
celebrate the most inspirational women within 
the transport and logistics sector.

DIVIDEND 
The Board is pleased to be recommending an 
increased final dividend of 6.63p per Ordinary 
Share for the year ended 31 March 2018 
(2017: 6.1p) bringing the total dividend for the 
year to 9.9p per Ordinary Share (2017: 9.1p). 
This reflects the Group’s growth in operating 
profit and its progressive dividend policy. 
The Board’s dividend policy remains unchanged. 

KEY PRIORITIES AND PROSPECTS
The Group’s overriding priority will be to 
oversee further progress in the delivery 
of the organic growth trading strategy. 
During the year we made significant progress 

by launching our enhanced propositions 
to cover the growing eFulfilment needs of 
customers. Additionally, we have brought 
new business development talent into the 
organisation to support our objective to drive 
future revenue growth. We continue to invest 
in the capabilities and resources to deliver our 
organic growth strategy, with our risk appetite 
remaining low to moderate. We continue to 
monitor the risks and opportunities that may 
arise from the Brexit process and to date the 
Group has experienced no material impact 
from the process.

The 2017 triennial review of the pension 
scheme continues and the Board seeks to 
agree an appropriate future plan with the 
Scheme Trustee whilst ensuring we take 
account of our commitment to the wider 
stakeholder group. The Group still has a 
sizeable pension deficit when measured on the 
more prudent Technical Provisions basis used 
for the triennial review, and so the pension 
scheme remains a significant stakeholder in 
the Group.

OUTLOOK
The Group remains well positioned in its 
chosen markets and continues to deliver strong 
service levels for customers. The action taken 
during the past year to reduce costs where 
necessary ensures we remain competitive 
for our customers and has been important 
in order to position the Group for the future. 
Robust cash generation supports our ability 
to invest in skills and technology capabilities 
to both protect and grow the business for 
the longer term. During the coming year the 
Board expects Wincanton to make continued 
strategic and operational progress.

Stewart Oades
Interim Chairman

3

Strategic reportGovernanceDirectors’ remuneration reportDirectors’ reportIndependent auditor’s reportAccountsWincanton plc Annual Report and Accounts 2018Strategic report

RETAIL & CONSUMER

Our Retail & Consumer operations are 
essential every day to the businesses 
of grocers and general retailers alike – 
seamlessly managing the flow of goods  
from production through to store or 
home delivery and returns management. 

With digital technology driving an abundance 
of opportunities for improved service, 
we’ll continue to be the partner of choice 
for many of the UK’s leading companies.

59%
of Group

56%
of Group

Revenue

Underlying operating profit

 £691.7m

 £29.7m

WHAT WE DO

eFulfilment 

Asset utilisation

Transformation

Our comprehensive range of services supports 
today’s multichannel retail environment. 
From order management and delivery to 
assembly of goods in the home and the 
efficient management of returns, we streamline 
processes and deliver customer satisfaction.

We sharpen our customers’ competitive 
edge by ensuring more efficient utilisation 
of their assets. We do this through a range 
of approaches including collaborative 
warehousing and shared transport options  
as well as re-deploying our own assets  
to support peak trading periods.

Our investment in innovation delivers 
continuous improvement, transforming 
the way we and our customers work by 
introducing new technologies and processes.

MARKET SECTORS

Retail general merchandise

Retail grocery

Consumer products

Our industry-leading eFulfilment services 
enable non-food retailers with store and/or 
online activities to rise to the challenges  
of a multichannel market.

Our flexible and reliable supply chain 
operations help food retailers serve  
consumer and trade customers efficiently  
and cost-effectively.

We integrate supply chains and create  
new, more efficient ways of working  
for manufacturers supplying the retail  
market with food or non-food products.

Customers include:

Customers include:

•  Argos
•  B&Q
•  Screwfix
•  wilko

Revenue  

 £384.2m

•  ASDA
•  Co-op
•  Sainsbury’s
•  Waitrose

Revenue  

 £197.8m

READ MORE ABOUT OUR STRATEGIC PROGRESS ON PAGE 14

4

Customers include:

•  GSK
•  Lucozade Ribena Suntory
•  The Kraft Heinz Company
•  Nestlé

Revenue 

 £109.7m

Wincanton plc Annual Report and Accounts 2018Our eFulfilment operations  
adapt quickly to changing 
shopping behaviours so that  
our customers can deliver  
the right brand experience.

CHALLENGES

HOW WE ARE RESPONDING

Delivering the right brand experience

As online purchases rise, the volume and value of last mile deliveries 
continue to increase. Retailers understand the risks associated with 
placing their brands in the hands of third parties and are looking for 
relationships based on trust and integrity.

Cost to serve 

With retailers demanding increased value from suppliers in a bid to 
counter squeezed margins, ‘cost to serve’ is a key issue that applies  
across all areas of the supply chain.

The customer journey

The ‘customer journey’ continues to be the primary focus for retailers. 
Today, consumers expect a seamless eCommerce experience, despite 
the challenges associated with increasingly complex supply chains.

Delivering for our customers
We pride ourselves on our home delivery expertise, and 
handle our customers’ reputation with as much care as 
we handle their goods. Our solutions enable retailers 
and consumers alike to benefit from the simplest and 
most seamless fulfilment methods in the industry – 
and our success is evidenced by customer results and 
independent reviews.

Continuously improving our operations
Our dedicated continuous improvement team is tasked 
with relentlessly optimising and improving operations. 
We work closely with our customers, tailoring our services 
to reduce the overall cost to serve while maintaining the 
highest service levels.

Evolving our capability
We work with a diverse range of major customers, 
developing smarter and more efficient ways of working 
to meet their multichannel needs. New technology and 
our never-ending drive for greater efficiency fuel a pipeline 
of initiatives – including the latest iteration of Manhattan 
Associates’ Warehouse Management System (WMS). 
This market-leading eCommerce solution gives us and our 
retail customers a flexible order fulfilment approach that 
delivers an integrated, multichannel buying experience for 
the consumer.

5

Strategic reportGovernanceDirectors’ remuneration reportDirectors’ reportIndependent auditor’s reportAccountsWincanton plc Annual Report and Accounts 2018Strategic report

INDUSTRIAL & TRANSPORT

Our Industrial & Transport operations  
deploy an extensive and specialised  
network to handle a wide range of  
industrial products – from fuel, bricks  
and engineering components to containers 
and general goods. Our operation teams 
also maintain fleets of LGVs and HGVs 
on behalf of customers.

41%
of Group

44%
of Group

Revenue

Underlying operating profit

 £480.2m

 £23.2m

WHAT WE DO

Transport 

Compliant operations

Asset optimisation 

We operate a large number of general and 
specialist vehicles. This includes the UK’s largest 
fleet of mechanical offloaders (for bricks and 
blocks), ready-mix cement mixers and fuel 
tankers in addition to general haulage vehicles.

In addition to consistently surpassing our 
own high targets for health and safety 
performance, we meet stringent compliance 
and accreditation standards including SC21, 
FORS and ADR. 

We optimise our fleet, as well as the fleets of 
our customers. We do this through effective 
support systems and an ever-increasing 
use of technology, supported by proactive 
maintenance, via the Pullman business, to 
ensure performance as well as compliance.

MARKET SECTORS

Transport services

Construction

Other

We provide general haulage, container 
transport and fleet maintenance services 
across the UK to retail, consumer and industrial 
customers as well as shipping lines and 
freight forwarders.

We ensure reliable delivery of construction 
materials including bricks and aggregates 
to sites UK-wide, with a proven ability to 
manage the timely flow of key products such 
as cement.

Customers include:

Customers include:

•  Howdens Joinery
•  Lucozade Ribena Suntory
•  Mediterranean Shipping Company (MSC)
•  Etex

Revenue

 £210.3m

•  Brett
•  Hanson
•  Ibstock
•  Tarmac

Revenue

 £150.6m

READ MORE ABOUT OUR STRATEGIC PROGRESS ON PAGE 14

We meet the most demanding compliance 
and operating requirements of specialist 
sectors including defence, energy and food.

Customers include:

•  BAE Systems
•  Müller Milk & Ingredients
•  Phillips 66
•  Valero

Revenue

 £119.3m

6

Wincanton plc Annual Report and Accounts 2018We continually develop our services 
to enhance our capability and ensure 
compliance as our markets evolve.

CHALLENGES

HOW WE ARE RESPONDING

Efficient and sustainable operations

Persistent cost pressures, coupled with a drive for stronger corporate and 
social responsibility, have led to businesses demanding greater efficiency 
– not only in terms of fuel economy and fleet optimisation, but also via  
a closer focus on sustainability.

Visibility and tracking

Shortened delivery timescales, together with fragmented drop locations 
across some sectors, mean that customers want to be confident that 
their logistics partner can deliver both accuracy and efficiency. 

Health and safety

Health and safety is a key issue for our industry, reflecting concerns 
around driver wellbeing and the challenges of running large vehicles  
on public highways.

Deploying new developments
We work closely with our suppliers to trial, evaluate and 
deploy new equipment. Our examples are wide ranging 
– from investing in new efficient vehicles to participating 
in Government trials of longer trailers. We’re also at the 
forefront of enhanced vehicle telematics which proactively 
track journeys to promote better driving methods and 
reduce accidents. Collectively, these initiatives deliver lower 
emissions, better efficiency and improved safety for our 
drivers and other road users.

Deploy technology to improve visibility 
and customer service
While our solutions are customer specific, we are 
increasingly deploying common technologies across our 
transport operations. For example, our Winsight in-cab 
technology improves fleet optimisation and delivery 
visibility by connecting our drivers with regional planning 
teams, creating effective route planning and providing 
fleet transparency. 

Delivering safety first
Health and safety is our top priority, and we are committed 
to raising awareness of its importance across all our driver 
and warehouse teams. We focus on behavioural change, 
and use specific training modules and approaches to 
engage drivers and warehouse staff – improving their 
individual skills and underpinning an enhanced and 
safer performance.

7

Strategic reportGovernanceDirectors’ remuneration reportDirectors’ reportIndependent auditor’s reportAccountsWincanton plc Annual Report and Accounts 2018Strategic report

BUSINESS MODEL

We use our supply chain expertise to transform our customers’ operations  
by improving service, increasing customer satisfaction, reducing cost to serve 
and ensuring greater safety. In order to do this we draw on the following 
resources from across the Group:

THE RESOURCES WE NEED

WHAT WE DO

WE DO IT 
THROUGH OUR VALUES

Excellence

Integrity

Passion

Proactivity

Togetherness

Trust

OUR SERVICES
•  We design and evaluate 

transport networks and find 
the solutions that balance cost 
with service.

•  We design and operate high 

density, automated warehouses 
or high volume pick and pack 
eCommerce operations.

•  With over 500 Lean Six Sigma 

specialists we create innovative 
solutions and implement 
cutting edge technology to 
drive continuous improvement.

•  We train our teams to ensure 
their safety and that of others 
around them.

CONTRACT TYPE

Open book operations

59%

Contracts will typically cover our 
costs plus an agreed management 
fee. This provides visible earnings 
with modest margins, but with 
low risk to the business.

Skilled knowledge and expertise 
of our people

Our people are the engine for our 
competitive advantage. Their skills 
and expertise enable our customers 
to succeed.

Employees

 17,700

Flexible warehouse facilities

An actively managed portfolio of 
Wincanton and customer locations, 
from dedicated sites to shared 
user operations.

Warehousing space

7.6m sqft

Multimodal transport operations

Owned and managed vehicles deliver 
a flexible, safe and efficient service.

Vehicles responsible for

3,600

Proven technology and 
logistics systems

Integrated and flexible systems provide 
customers with visibility and control.

Locations

200+ 

8

Wincanton plc Annual Report and Accounts 2018WHAT WE DO

CONTRACT TYPE

OUR CAPABILITY
•  Our IT team can specify 
and deploy warehouse 
management systems, manage 
them in‑life and migrate them 
to alternative platforms.

•  Our HR team can transfer 

employees (in line with TUPE 
legislation), handle large 
workforces, recruit and retain 
employees through our strong 
talent pipeline, strengthen 
employee engagement and 
develop employees.

•  Our property team can source 
warehouses across the UK and 
Ireland, manage leases and seek 
collaborative opportunities to 
maximise space.

•  Our environment team supports 
the improvement and delivery 
of more sustainable operations.

Closed book operations

41%

Contracts are competitively priced 
and see us own the principal 
financial opportunity along with 
manageable and controllable 
risks. Greater deployment of 
resources across contracts offers 
improved returns.

THE VALUE WE CREATE

Customer focused delivery

Whether delivering to a building site,  
a distribution centre, a high street store 
or end customer our aim is to provide 
a leading customer experience.

More efficient supply chains

By improving service, reducing waste 
and maximising capacity, we look to 
make our customers’ supply chains 
better – every day.

A safer environment for all

We maintain a relentless focus on the 
health and safety of our employees, 
visitors and the communities we serve.

Sustainable operations

We drive reductions in our emissions 
via investment, awareness, training 
and recognition – all enabled by 
changing behaviours.

Shareholder value

We rigorously manage our business, 
our costs and our risks to generate 
sustainable total shareholder returns. 

9

Strategic reportGovernanceDirectors’ remuneration reportDirectors’ reportIndependent auditor’s reportAccountsWincanton plc Annual Report and Accounts 2018OUR STRATEGY

Our strategic business performance will continue  
to be driven by the following strategic pillars:

Drive efficient operations...
...through integrated and  
consistent services

Differentiate  
our position...
...by delivering 
innovation, 
collaboration and  
safe, sustainable  
operations

Growth
By putting customers  
at the centre of  
what we do

Be an 
organisation  
that people 
aspire to...
...work for  
and with

READ MORE ABOUT OUR STRATEGIC PROGRESS ON PAGE 14

10

Strategic reportWincanton plc Annual Report and Accounts 2018HOW WE MEASURE PERFORMANCE

Revenue 

£1,171.9m
+4.8%

2018

2017

2016

Underlying EBITDA1 

£64.8m
+1.4%

Underlying operating profit1

£52.9m
+1.5%

1,171.9

2018

1,118.1

2017

1,147.4

2016

64.8

63.9

65.4

2018

2017

2016

52.9

52.1

50.9

Consolidated Group revenue.

Operating profit before all amortisation and 
depreciation charges and before exceptional items.

Operating profit before amortisation of acquired 
intangibles and exceptional items.

Underlying operating profit margin1 

4.5%

‑20bps

2018

2017

2016

4.5

4.7

4.4

Our KPIs

Net debt1

£29.5m
+21.4%

2018

2017

2016

29.5

24.3

39.5

Underlying operating profit as a percentage 
of revenue.

Borrowings and other financial liabilities net of cash 
and cash equivalents.

Lost Time Incident Frequency Rate (LTIFR)

Employee Engagement Score

Underlying EPS1 

30.8p

+11.2%

2018

2017

2016

0.62

‑8.8%

30.8

27.7

23.9

2018

2017

2016

Profit for the year attributable to equity shareholders 
of Wincanton plc before amortisation of acquired 
intangibles, exceptional items and the tax impact 
of those items, as well as other exceptional tax 
items, divided by the weighted average number of 
Ordinary Shares in issue throughout the year.

Number of lost time incidents per 100,000 
2015
hours worked.

66%

+2.0%

2018

2017

2016

66

64

64

The percentage of positive responses to five specific 
statements within the employee survey.

1  See page 27 for further information on the Alternative 

Performance Measures (APMs), including definitions and 
a reconciliation of APMs to statutory measures.

0.62

0.68

0.71

0.70

11

Strategic reportGovernanceDirectors’ remuneration reportDirectors’ reportIndependent auditor’s reportAccountsWincanton plc Annual Report and Accounts 2018Strategic report

CHIEF EXECUTIVE’S STATEMENT

The Group has made  
good progress against  
its strategic objectives  
as it adds capability to  
meet the changing  
needs of our customers.

Adrian Colman 
Chief Executive

PERFORMANCE SUMMARY

Revenue (£m)
Underlying EBITDA (£m)1
Underlying operating profit (£m)1
Underlying operating margin (%)1
Underlying EPS (p)1
Dividend per share (p)
Closing net debt (£m)2

2018
1,171.9
64.8
52.9
4.5%
30.8
9.9
(29.5)

2017 
1,118.1
63.9
52.1
4.7%
27.7
9.1
(24.3)

Change
4.8%
1.4%
1.5%
(20)bps

1  Page 27 provides further information on Alternative Performance Measures (APMs), including definitions and a reconciliation of APMs to statutory measures. 
2  Net debt is the sum of cash and bank balances, bank loans and overdrafts and other financial liabilities. Note 26 to the financial statements provides a breakdown  

0of net debt for the current and prior periods. 

12

Wincanton plc Annual Report and Accounts 2018During the year ended 31 March 2018 the 
Group has delivered a positive set of results 
underpinned by consistent operational 
performance. The Group has also made good 
progress against its strategic objectives during 
the year as it adds capability to meet the 
changing needs of our customers. 

Revenue in the year ended 31 March 2018 was 
£1,171.9m (2017: £1,118.1m), which represents 
a year on year increase of 4.8%. This has been 
driven primarily by revenue from contract wins 
including IKEA, Hanson, wilko and Wickes. 

Underlying operating profit increased by 1.5% 
to £52.9m (2017: £52.1m). A strong performance 
in our Retail & Consumer business was partly 
offset by a more challenging year for our 
Industrial & Transport business. As a result, the 
underlying operating margin of 4.5% is slightly 
lower than the 4.7% achieved in the prior year. 

The Group took action during the year to 
reposition its cost base and capacity in 
certain areas to mitigate the weaker than 
expected performance in the Industrial & 
Transport sector. The implementation of these 
cost saving initiatives has resulted in a net 
exceptional charge of £6.2m and helps position 
the business so that it remains competitive and 
effective for future years. 

Strong underlying EPS growth of 11.2% reflects 
the growth in operating profit and lower net 
financing costs as we reduced the average cost 
of debt utilised during the year. This growth in 
underlying earnings enables us to also increase 
our recommended final dividend per share  
to 6.63p, resulting in a total dividend per share 
of 9.9p for the year. 

Group underlying EPS

2018

2017

2016

2015

2014

30.8

27.7

23.9

21.1

16.6

0

5

10

15

20

25

30

Pence

RETAIL & CONSUMER

2018

Revenue (£m)
Underlying 
operating profit (£m)
Margin (%)

691.7 649.3

2017 Change
6.5%

25.8 15.1%
29.7
4.3% 4.0% 30 bps

Retail & Consumer reported revenues of 
£691.7m in the year, a 6.5% year on year increase 
compared with the £649.3m reported in the 
year to 31 March 2017. The contractual split of 
this segment between open and closed book 
remains relatively unchanged with 85% under 
open book terms (2017: 87%). 

Underlying operating profit for the year was 
£29.7m, up 15.1% on the £25.8m reported last 
year as a result of new business wins together 
with increased volume predominantly in Retail 
general merchandise. 

The split of Retail & Consumer revenue by the 
industry sectors it serves is as follows: 

new technology and fleet to support their 
multichannel strategy; and a three year 
contract with Argos to manage and support  
a network reorganisation. 

Retail general merchandise has also further 
expanded its relationship with IKEA with the 
award of a three year contract to provide 
two‑man home delivery services in the  
South East of England. 

The business also successfully renewed a 
number of important contracts with key 
customers, such as KraftHeinz and Argos. 
All of these important renewals demonstrate 
the strong partnership‑based ethos with 
our customers and our commitment 
to driving greater efficiency into these 
logistics operations. 

Overall sector growth was partially offset by 
a contract loss in Retail grocery with Tesco 
who took back the operation of a warehouse 
in‑house. 

2018  
£m

2017 

£m Change

INDUSTRIAL & TRANSPORT

Retail general 
merchandise
Retail grocery
Consumer products 109.7

384.2 315.5 21.8%
197.8 228.7 (13.5)%
4.4%
105.1
6.5%
691.7 649.3

The overall revenue increase was driven 
primarily by strong wins and volume growth 
in Retail general merchandise. Our strong 
eFulfilment proposition continues to drive 
revenue growth, especially in Home & DIY 
markets, where our market leading two‑man 
home delivery service helps our customers 
improve their customers’ experience.

Several significant new contracts commenced 
operations during the period, including a four 
year contract with IKEA to set up and operate 
two new distribution centres to support their 
multichannel distribution growth strategy; a 
five year contract with wilko managing all UK 
transport operations from store replenishment 
to yard management and backhaul; a three 
year contract with Wickes to operate home 
delivery of building products implementing 

Revenue (£m)
Underlying 
operating profit  
(£m)
Margin (%)

2018 
480.2

2017 
468.8

Change
2.4%

23.2
4.8%

26.3
(11.8)%
5.6% (80)bps

Industrial & Transport reported revenues of 
£480.2m in the year, up 2.4% on the £468.8m 
reported in the prior year. 

The underlying operating profit of £23.2m 
compared to £26.3m last year was driven 
by weaker than expected operational and 
financial performance from certain transport‑
related activities and a contract cessation 
realising property‑related credits in the 
prior year. 

The split of Industrial & Transport revenue  
by the activities undertaken is as follows:

Transport  
services
Construction
Other

2018  
£m

2017 
£m

Change 

210.3
150.6
119.3
480.2

207.0
134.4
127.4
468.8

1.6%
12.1%
(6.4)%
2.4%

The increase in revenue compared to last 
year is primarily due to new contracts within 
Construction including several contract wins 
for our new ready‑mix cement proposition as it 
gains traction in the market place. The growth 
in Construction was partly offset, however, 
by lower than expected volumes in our final 
quarter, in part attributable to the poor weather 
and the year‑on‑year impact of the cessation of 
a contract within our defence operations in the 
prior year. 

13

Strategic reportGovernanceDirectors’ remuneration reportDirectors’ reportIndependent auditor’s reportAccountsWincanton plc Annual Report and Accounts 2018CHIEF EXECUTIVE’S STATEMENT CONTINUED

During the year the markets for our Transport 
Services activities, which comprise General 
Haulage, Container Logistics and Pullman Fleet 
Services, have all been extremely competitive 
with customers seeking lowest cost service 
provision to help mitigate other cost challenges 
that they face. As a result, we have seen 
significant change in the contract profile and 
mix of work in this area through a number of 
contract wins and losses that have broadly left 
revenue flat year‑on‑year.

The level of change in the contract portfolio 
and mix of work across the sector, particularly 
in Transport Services, impacted the balance of 
activities and operational effectiveness across 
our networks, adversely affecting the operating 
profit performance for the year. This required 
the Group to take significant action to 
rebalance costs and capacity across our 
networks to improve performance. The costs 
of this reorganisation are included within the 
exceptional charge for the year noted above. 

The business also successfully renewed a 
number of contracts during the year including 
those with Phillips 66 and Pernod Ricard.

STRATEGIC PROGRESS
We continue to focus on growing the Group 
organically and aim to deliver a resilient, 
predictable cash and profit stream and a 
growing return for all our stakeholders. We do 
this through the following strategic pillars:

1.  Differentiate our position in the logistics 
industry through delivering innovation, 
collaboration and safe, sustainable operations

2.  Grow by putting customers at the centre  

of what we do

3.  Drive efficient operations through integrated 

and consistent services

4.  Be an organisation that people aspire to work 

for and with

We have set out our progress against these 
pillars below:

power of Wincanton with our colleagues,  
or our customers or our partners. During the 
year we sought to generate and capture great 
ideas and convert these into new propositions 
to take to our customers through a variety of 
programmes under the W2 umbrella. 

•  W2 Labs 

We ran a W2 Labs initiative, to identify and 
work with a number of start‑up businesses 
from around the globe that had the 
potential to add value to our business. 
This programme helped us enhance our 
eFulfilment proposition, by partnering with 
two companies who brought capability 
and differentiation, and enabled us to get 
to market faster than if we had built these 
capabilities in‑house. 
•  W2 Partner Network  

We launched the W2 Partner Network, 
which will help us add more partners to 
collaborate with and to grow the business 
by widening our offering and working with 
companies whose reach opens up new areas 
of mutual opportunity. 
•  W2 Ideas Accelerator  

We launched an internal programme 
supported by a social media platform 
that allows colleagues to pose challenges 
and problems and seek ideas, solutions 
and comments from across the business. 
This helps us ensure that great ideas 
from colleagues are shared across the 
organisation, recognised, rewarded and 
where possible commercialised into 
propositions that we can take to our 
customers to enhance our services to them. 

We seek to position our business at the 
leading edge of thought leadership around 
the challenges that our industry and our 
customers will face over the medium term. 
This was embodied in ‘The Wincanton Guide 
to the Digitised Supply Chain’. We are gearing 
up for our role in the digitised supply chain 
by developing a deep understanding of 
what our customer needs are and how they 
are developing their own unique approach 
to robotics, autonomous vehicles, artificial 
intelligence, machine learning and so on.  
It is essential for us to be recognised as a 

leading logistics business where digitisation is 
a central component of our highly compelling, 
differentiated, offering to the market. 

COLLABORATION
Wincanton operates across a wide cross 
section of the physical goods economy. 
As such its operations deal with all of the 
cyclicality of its customers’ businesses on a 
daily, weekly and annual basis. Uniquely we 
aim to analyse and interpret this data to provide 
the flexible solutions that enable our customers 
to meet their seasonal peaks in their demand 
for logistics services by smart deployment of 
capability and assets from other sectors when 
they are in quieter periods. Bringing this to life 
we provided over 1,450 extra peak transport 
shifts into the Retail sector across the Christmas 
peak period, many of which were provided 
from within the talent pool of drivers and the 
vehicle assets from our Construction business 
which typically is coming out of its autumnal 
peak cycle at that time. This benefits our 
customers as they are able to access flexible 
resources when they need them rather than 
having to commit to resource levels across a 
full year at the peak level, and thereby reducing 
costs to their organisation.

SAFETY AND SUSTAINABILITY
Behaving as a responsible business is central  
to everything we do at Wincanton. 

Our people and their health, safety and 
wellbeing come first in every decision we 
make. The safety of colleagues is a non‑
negotiable commitment and we believe 
that this is achieved through ensuring strong 
cultural engagement around behavioural 
approach to health and safety as well as 
technical training and robust processes. 
This is highlighted in our Your Pulse colleague 
engagement survey where scores on health 
and safety awareness and responsibilities 
continue to be the highest scoring areas 
amongst our colleagues. In the last 12 months 
we saw a continued reduction in reported 
safety incidents and a continued improvement 
in our Lost Time Incident Frequency Rate 
performance indicator from 0.68 last year to 

1. Differentiate our position  
in the logistics industry 

INNOVATION
We make innovation a central theme internally, 
in our engagement with colleagues and 
externally in our everyday engagement with 
customers. Our W2 programme is the linking 
theme for innovation at Wincanton. W2 is  
all about the power of two, the combined  

14

Strategic reportWincanton plc Annual Report and Accounts 20180.62 this year. We were also recognised for our 
performance with safety awards during the 
year from external bodies such as Chartered 
Institute for Logistics and Transport (CILT) 
and the Royal Society for the Prevention of 
Accidents (RoSPA). This confirms the value 
of our approach, focus and ongoing training 
programmes with our people. 

During the year we again worked hard to 
minimise our impact on the environment. 
We were very pleased to take delivery of 
our first fully electric trucks from Daimler. 
The Group will initially deploy the 7.5 tonne 
vehicles for use in inner city logistics, where 
the challenges of emissions, noise and 
congestion are greatest. These vehicles will be 
rolled out as part of our home delivery fleet. 
The environmental challenges of delivery in 
urban areas, particularly in ‘the last mile’, are 
significant and growing. As a business, we are 
committed to addressing these issues, to find 
cost‑effective and sustainable solutions for 
our customers. 

The introduction of production‑level electric 
vehicles to our fleet means we can operate 
more efficiently, more quietly and without 
locally emitted CO2. When we are delivering 
in towns and cities, we know that this really 
does matter, right down to the door step. 
These vehicles are a key part of our innovation 
roadmap, and our growth plan for the future 
of urban distribution transport at Wincanton. 

2. Grow
We aim to grow the Group into a full service 
contract logistics provider, putting the 
customer at the centre and driving efficient 
operations. During the period we grew 
revenue by 4.8%, achieving this through a 
combination of extending the services we 
provide to existing customers as well as 
acquiring new customers. 

We have expanded our relationship with 
IKEA with the award of a three year contract 
to provide two‑man home delivery services 
in the South East of England. This builds on 
Wincanton’s strength as a leading provider of 
high quality consumer experience for our retail 
customers and enhances the range of services 
we provide to IKEA to add to the warehouse 
operations that we established for them in the 
previous year. For Aggregate Industries we have 
expanded the range of services we provide to 
them through the introduction of ready‑mix 
cement services which we have been rolling 
out to the construction sector to offer a new 
level of service resilience and consistency to 
the industry. 

We were also delighted to commence 
partnering with new customers such as Wickes 
and Thales during the year. For Wickes, part 
of the Travis Perkins Group, we have started 
to manage the collation and delivery of bulky 
goods, such as bricks, tiles and paving, to 
customers. This solution draws on our expertise 

in customer service from our market leading 
two‑man home delivery service together  
with the technical knowledge and expertise 
from our Construction business in handling 
and delivering such products. With Thales  
we are pleased to have been awarded a five 
year warehousing and distribution contract  
in which Wincanton will become sole logistics 
provider, supporting the simplification and 
increased efficiency of Thales’ supply chain to 
operate national distribution and warehousing 
of their critical component supply chain. 

3. Drive efficient operations
Our track record in continuous improvement 
helps our customers in terms of lowering their 
cost of operations in open book contracts 
and supports our margins in closed book 
contracts. This continued drive to improve 
efficiency of operations strongly supports 
our ability to retain existing contracts with 
customers and build long term partnerships. 
During the year we successfully renewed and 
extended contracts with existing customers 
including Argos, Phillips 66, Pernod Ricard and 
Ibstock. We also responded to the needs of 
the competitive market place we operate in 
and the challenges in our Industrial & Transport 
business with a restructuring of the capabilities 
in this sector in order to reposition the business 
to remain competitive in future years. 

4. Be an organisation that people 
aspire to work for and with
Our people are central to the great operational 
delivery that Wincanton prides itself on, 
working to make our customers’ businesses 
better every day. Without their support, we 

have no business to run so their engagement 
is a key priority. I would like to thank them 
for their dedication and performance during 
the year. 

Developing a pipeline of talent is a high  
priority for the Group to ensure that we nurture 
and develop talent for the maintenance of 
existing activities and drive the delivery of our 
ambitious growth targets. During the year 
Wincanton ran 45 apprenticeship programmes 
as part of this commitment to develop logistics 
talent inside our organisation. 

In the UK economy over the past year we 
have seen very high levels of employment 
and we are focused on ensuring that we 
recruit and retain people into our business to 
deliver great customer service and to help us 
grow. We have continued our specific focus 
on driver resourcing. Our ability to attract 
drivers to our business is a real strength of the 
Group and presents a compelling proposition 
to customers who recognise the scarcity 
of qualified and talented drivers in the UK. 
We source drivers from as wide a pool as 
possible, conduct and support driver training 
and licence acquisition and do all that we 
can to ensure we retain our driving talent by 
recognising their skills through such events as 
the Wincanton Driver of the Year competition. 
Our Warehouse to Wheels driver programme 
supports talented colleagues from non‑driving 
roles to train to be drivers in our business and 
we see this as a great advantage as part of our 
focus on recruiting and retaining talent.

15

Strategic reportGovernanceDirectors’ remuneration reportDirectors’ reportIndependent auditor’s reportAccountsWincanton plc Annual Report and Accounts 2018Delivering  
innovation now

Technology has driven a huge shift in what consumers expect from 
logistics operations. Put simply, we all want it now. And we want  
it faster, better and cheaper than ever before.

At Wincanton, we’re the enablers underpinning this transformation.  
In this section, we share some of the developments that are delivering 
innovation now – and driving next generation thinking.

W2 LABS
We are not alone
In 2017, we launched a new initiative to work 
with a number of start-ups from around the 
world in developing innovative solutions to 
some of the challenges faced by our industry. 
W2 Labs is a process that brings together 
talented teams from our business, paired 
with carefully selected start-up businesses to 
accelerate the application of new, innovative 
products and services, to drive digitisation 
across the supply chain.

Over the course of the year, we evaluated 
92 applications from 12 countries before 
settling on a shortlist of 24 start-ups that were 
invited to pitch. Six companies were identified 
as having the greatest potential and these 
progressed to a ten week development stage 
that saw them work with our business experts 
to hone their ideas and prove their concepts 
in the context of our day-to-day operations. 
The final six also engaged in trials with some of 
our major customers, using real business data 
to refine and streamline their propositions.

In September, we held a demo day where each 
start-up presented its concepts to a range of 
our key stakeholders. We’re currently working 
closely with these start-ups and two have 
already made it into the eFulfilment service 
which we announced in the year. Another  
start-up based proposition is likely to be 
launched in the year ahead.

We can see how the W2 Labs programme 
can help us lead improvements in areas such 
as safety, shortened supply chains, robotics, 
the Internet of Things (IoT) and increased 
digitisation – all to improve the customer 
experience and support our growth ambitions.

16

W2 PARTNER NETWORK
Shaping the future, together
Through the W2 Partner Network, we aim 
to explore how innovative technologies will 
impact the evolution of the supply chain in 
the near future and beyond. 

Partners will work alongside our own teams, 
combining the very latest innovations, 
expertise and knowledge. The outcome will be 
commercial opportunities that draw on a wide 
range of technologies, such as AI, Blockchain 
and Internet of Things (IoT) – to address the 
current and future needs of our customers and 
support our own operations.

 W2 Labs pitch day 

and demo day
W2 Labs pitch day, held 
at CodeNode, London 
and demo day held at 
Wincanton Worksop. 

 92

W2 Labs received  
92 applications  
from 12 countries

Strategic reportWincanton plc Annual Report and Accounts 2018ELECTRIC TRUCKS
The quiet revolution
The environmental challenges of delivery in 
urban areas, particularly in ‘the last mile’, are 
significant and growing. We’re committed 
to investing in cost-effective and sustainable 
solutions that minimise our impact on society 
– and early in 2018 we were proud to become
the first UK 3PL to introduce production-level 
electric vehicles to its fleet.

We’re initially deploying the five 7.5t Daimler 
Trucks’ FUSO eCanter vehicles on a trial for 
inner city logistics, where the challenges of 
emissions, noise and congestion are greatest. 
In our view, this is game-changing technology 
that can make a real difference to the quality of 
life of people across the UK – and our ambition 
is to roll-out these vehicles as part of our home 
delivery fleet.

 Layer picking
Productive picking 
of layer quantities by 
robotic layer picking 
technology.

 97%

automated handling  
of product lines

 Electric vehicles
Wincanton’s Daimler 
Trucks’ FUSO eCanter 
vehicle on launch day.

 5

new electric vehicles 
start their trials 
with Wincanton

AUTOMATION
57 options, and counting...
With consumer expectations rapidly changing, 
it’s not surprising that some warehouse and 
system infrastructures are struggling to keep 
pace. So when KraftHeinz wanted to introduce 
a fully-automated system to replace ageing 
technology, a high degree of flexibility was 
one of the company’s key requirements.

Because we collaborate with a wide range of 
equipment and technology providers, we’re 
able to tailor an automation solution to meet 
their specific needs. In the case of KraftHeinz, 
this meant drawing on all our 13 years of 
automated layer picking experience to specify 
a solution that would drive efficiency by 
automating the handling of over 97% of the 
company’s product lines.

EFULFILMENT
Delivering excellence, from orders 
to returns
When consumers buy online, the delivery 
service is often the most tangible manifestation 
of a customer’s brand. And we work very 
hard to enhance that brand through our full 
eFulfilment solution.

We collaborate with leading technology 
providers to deliver customer satisfaction 
and cost-efficiency around the complete 
eFulfilment cycle, from multichannel 
warehousing, carrier management and 
a range of delivery options through 
to returns management and back to 
eCommerce warehousing.

FOR MORE INFORMATION ON WINCANTON’S   
VISION FOR THE FUTURE VISIT:
W W W.WINCANTON.CO.UK /INNOVATION

17

Strategic reportGovernanceDirectors’ remuneration reportDirectors’ reportIndependent auditor’s reportAccountsWincanton plc Annual Report and Accounts 2018Driving next 
generation thinking

As a business, we have to be scanning the horizon for all kinds 
of relevant technology, so that we understand how best to 
deploy it for, and with, our customers. 

Here, we look at four areas of rapid development and promise, 
each of which could have a tangible impact on the Supply 
Chain. These are topics which come to us through our work 
with the W2 Partner Network, W2 Labs and our support of  
a number of collaborative groups, such as the Digital Supply 
Chain Leaders Network.
ROBOTICS
The robots are helping
We were one of the pioneers of warehouse 
automation and we’re already working on how 
next generation robotic technology can help 
our customers grow their business.

AUTONOMOUS TRUCKS
In the fast lane of the 
connected highway 
Today, even mid-range family cars can 
park themselves. In the not-too-distant 
future, vehicles including trucks will be 
entirely autonomous. 

The advent of autonomous vehicles will 
be made possible by a broad range of new 
technology, coupled with current tools such as 
telematics. Allied to the ongoing development 
of the connected highway and smart cities, 
where vehicles communicate with each other 
as well as with roads and infrastructure.

The benefits will not just be felt in financial 
terms: autonomous vehicles should remove 
human error from the road network, reducing 
congestion and saving lives. In fact, on-board 
systems can react in less than 0.1 seconds, 
compared to human reaction time of 
1.4 seconds.

Wincanton is already working with its main 
vehicle suppliers to understand what this 
means for our business, our customers, road 
safety and how our service proposition 
develops, as part of our long term planning.

For picking and packing, robots are more agile 
and able to work in tighter spaces. That means 
warehouses can be packed with more goods, 
boosting efficiency. Similarly, robot truck 
loaders and unloaders can navigate inside 
a trailer, sensing their surroundings right 
down to the shapes and sizes of packages. 
Drones can carry out inventory checks 
frequently and accurately, both inside and 
outside of the warehouse, while autonomous 
vehicles shift pallets to and from their storage 
locations. Wincanton has been an early adopter 
of robotic technology and has over a decade 
of experience already, but now we’re focused 
on the next generation of high-intensity, 
super-dense warehouse systems where 
integrated robotics and automation moves 
into the mainstream.

18

 90%

of goods in global trade are 
carried by the ocean shipping 
industry each year. A new 
blockchain solution from IBM and 
Maersk will help manage and track 
the paper trail of tens of millions 
of shipping containers across the 
world by digitising the supply 
chain process.2

 87%

of UK manufacturers 
are ready to invest in 
productivity-enhancing 
digital technologies.4

BLOCKCHAIN
Connecting the links in the 
supply chain
As the technology that underpins the 
cryptocurrency Bitcoin, Blockchain’s strength 
lies in its ability to maintain unalterable records 
of each asset in a transaction that means it can 
build and support an environment of trust.

For many of our customers, Blockchain  
has the potential to provide a new and 
immutable level of traceability throughout 
the supply chain.

Strategic reportWincanton plc Annual Report and Accounts 201869%

The percentage of online visits via mobile 
devices continues its upwards trend, now 
representing 69% of all visits.1

+50%

In 2016 UK digital tech investment 
reached £6.8 billion, that’s 50% higher 
than any other European country.3

DIGITISATION

Some of our food retailer customers are already 
trialling Blockchain and have successfully 
used it to track products from farm to shelf 
in a matter of seconds instead of days or 
even months.

Obstacles remain before we expect to see large 
scale adoption of Blockchain, but this is an area 
we’re monitoring closely because Wincanton’s 
role will be to ensure that the chain is not only 
unbroken but also augmented with relevant 
data at key points in the journey, either to site 
or store.

THE INTERNET OF TRUCKS
Track and trace, but not  
as we know it
The Internet of Things (IoT) doesn’t just mean 
that your home fridge can order more milk 
when supplies run low, it’s also providing the 
momentum for the shift towards connected 
logistics and, specifically, what we at Wincanton 
have coined as the ‘Internet of Trucks’.

With technology convergence such as this, 
our ability to proactively drive KPIs for our 3PL 
customers, moves us into the thought leader 
position. Equally, there is a direct connection 
between the usual Internet of Things and 

everything we do within our W2 Labs 
programme, the W2 Partner Network and 
how we create compelling, differentiated 
propositions for our customers.

Sources
IMRG quarterly benchmarking report, Q4 2017/18
1 
2 
IBM press release
3  Tech Nation 2017
4  The Manufacturer – Manufacturing 2020 Report

19

Strategic reportGovernanceDirectors’ remuneration reportDirectors’ reportIndependent auditor’s reportAccountsWincanton plc Annual Report and Accounts 2018that we have the right people in the right 
positions at the right time in order to effectively 
deliver the strategy. We believe strongly in 
rewarding great performance and recognise 
outstanding achievements with bonus 
payments and our ‘Colleague of the Month’ 
and ‘Driver of the Year’ awards.

Our Wincanton learning and development 
activities include a wide range of 
different initiatives.

For example, we operate an apprenticeship 
programme across all areas of the business, 
from warehousing and driving to support 
functions, team leaders and management. 
We’re proud that our team currently includes 
over 350 apprentices and that we’re finalists in 
the Bristol & Bath Apprenticeship Awards 2018.

Talent and management development is 
the key to a sustainable future, and here we 
provide a comprehensive range of training 
programmes which aim to fast-track our high 
potential people, ensuring that we get the 
best out of them and that they enjoy full and 
rewarding careers. Our well-established model 
captures employee performance and potential, 
which are the cornerstones for a structured 
approach to succession planning. This in 
turn provides a framework that enables us to 
develop a strong talent pipeline. Our talent 
pipeline ensures we can create the best teams 
for our customers and that we can effectively 
deliver operational excellence over the years 
to come.

In terms of operational efficiency, we follow  
a Lean Sigma programme – an internationally-
respected methodology that improves 
productivity and cuts costs by eliminating 

Strategic report

CORPORATE RESPONSIBILITY REPORT

Playing our part to the full 
We aim to be a positive influence at all times, not only  
on the lives of our people, but also on the communities 
where we work as well as on the environment.

...AND DELIVERED BY A GREAT,  
DIVERSE TEAM
Diversity isn’t just a nice-to-have, it’s essential to 
creating a well-balanced team that reflects our 
society, the communities where we live and 
our customer base. 

At Wincanton, we’re committed to employee 
diversity, equality and inclusion. We work hard 
to ensure that employees of all backgrounds, 
genders and ethnicity are valued equally 
and that we treat each other with respect. 
We expect every single employee to take part 
in our diversity programmes, which endorse 
these expectations.

Our culture also demands the highest 
ethical standards. We do the right thing and 
always support each other – whether that 
means making sure everybody is safe and 
healthy, or creating a collaborative, respectful 
working environment across the business.

DEVELOPING OUR PEOPLE
We help our people be the best they can be. 
That’s not just good for our business, it’s good 
for their self-respect and career opportunities. 
For example, we provide a deep, broad 
and continual learning and development 
programme at every level of Wincanton. 
This programme plays a key role in ensuring 

CREATING A SUSTAINABLE  
ENVIRONMENT FOR ALL
Our approach to Corporate Social 
Responsibility contributes to growth and 
shareholder value by investing in the 
capabilities and wellbeing of our people, 
creating value for our customers through 
innovation, and contributing to the positive 
future of the communities in which we operate, 
as well as our natural environment.

OUR PEOPLE: THE WINCANTON 
DIFFERENCE
As a people-powered business, our people 
are ultimately what makes us stand out. 
Dedicated teams are at the heart of what we 
aim to deliver to our customers to ensure great 
customer service, success and the long-term 
sustainability of our business.

We’re committed to recruiting the very best 
talent, and provide opportunities for all 
colleagues to develop and grow across every 
area of our operations. It’s important to us that 
our people are happy in their work, that they 
go home safely at the end of every day and 
that they represent the local communities in 
which we operate.

GREAT PERFORMANCE IS 
UNDERPINNED BY GREAT VALUES...
Created by our employees, our values express 
how we work with colleagues and customers. 
Every person at Wincanton, from boardroom  
to warehouse floor, lives these values every day.

•  Excellence. At every level and in every task, 

we aim to be the best at what we do.

•  Integrity. We do the right things for the right 
reasons, to make the right call every time.

•  Passion. We love logistics and work diligently 

and with passion.

•  Proactivity. Every day, we seek opportunities 

to be one step ahead.

•  Trust. We rely on each other in good times 

and bad, whether the pressure is on or we’re 
just having fun.

•  Togetherness. We work as one team, 
collaboratively and without hidden 
agendas. We come together to help each 
other succeed.

20

Wincanton plc Annual Report and Accounts 2018waste, defects and deviations. We supplement 
theoretical training programmes with real 
live projects in order to encourage practical 
understanding of the main issues, and ensure 
that leadership teams invest sufficient time to 
properly define and review the entire process.

Our rigorous driver training and assessment 
programme provides exceptional 
opportunities to improve the skills of our 
drivers. Our training programmes and modules 
are fully documented and have been classed 
by JAUPT (Joint Approvals Unit for Periodic 
Training) as approved courses for compliance 
with the LGV DCPC (Driver Certificate of 
Professional Competence) . This means that all 
our sites used for driver training, as well as our 
166 authorised driver trainers and assessors, 
are able to provide internal and external 
training, in-line with the EU Statutory Training 
Directive. Each driver undertakes an annual, 
comprehensive planned driving assessment 
supplemented by further assessments if the 
driver is involved in a safety incident during 
the year. 

During the year we began trialling a new 
programme designed to bring people with 
potential into our business and develop 
them into logistics professionals. #YourFuture 
was pioneered and implemented by the 
Wincanton team at our Nestlé Purina operation 
in Hams Hall. Although still in its infancy, this 
two to three year apprenticeship scheme 
programme is already proving a sustainable 
way to learn while gaining practical experience. 
It mixes hands-on experience with learning 
delivered by external training providers.

Our industry suffers from a deficit of skills and 
graduate talent. To address this situation, we 
helped found the NOVUS Trust – an industry-
wide initiative run by the Chartered Institute  
of Logistics and Transport (CILT). The trust aims 
to bridge the skills gaps and create the supply 
chain leaders of tomorrow. Those successful  
in passing a rigorous selection process are able 
to join a ground-breaking course designed 
with Huddersfield University. Admission to 
the course guarantees participants a mentor 
and an industrial placement with a sponsor 
company, including Wincanton – then, 
following completion of the course, a graduate 
level job.

LISTENING IS MORE IMPORTANT 
THAN TALKING
Listening to our employees is the starting point 
for the way in which we create and deliver our 
people-facing programmes. 

We use a range of approaches to capture 
what our people think about their careers and 
our business activities. For example, we hold 
listening group meetings with all our major 
employee stakeholders at depots, warehouses 
and offices. This year, we also introduced 
new steering groups for other key colleagues, 
including general managers and drivers. 

These informal meetings complement our 
more structured regular departmental and 
group-wide meetings. 

Towards the end of the financial year, we 
launched our new ‘Your Pulse’ employee 
engagement survey, which doubles the 
frequency at which we ask for the opinions  
of our staff. By replacing our annual survey 
with this more frequent, online approach, we 
are effectively shortening the time between 
capturing colleagues’ feedback and taking 
action. We achieved a 66% response rate,  
an improvement of 2% on the previous year. 
The findings from each survey are reviewed  
at all levels Wincanton and help shape strategy 
across the business.

In addition to informal meetings and our 
engagement surveys, we organise regular 
business briefings to ensure that our managers 
are fully informed about our progress. These 
‘State of the Nation’ briefings are hosted by 
the Executive Management Team (EMT) and 
involve the sharing of business performance, 
in-depth Q&A sessions, new innovations and 
real-world case studies. We also offer expert 
sessions from around the Group about the key 
challenges and opportunities we face.

Taken together, these approaches to listening 
and acting on feedback from colleagues 
enable us to deliver positive changes as part 
of our continuous improvement agenda.

PROMOTING HEALTH 
AND WELLBEING
Our employees are our greatest asset and 
we want to help them to be as healthy and 
happy as possible. Our health and wellbeing 
campaign focuses on improving our 
employees’ knowledge and understanding 
of health issues particular to the logistics 
industry that align with national health 
awareness campaigns. 

SAFETY: NO ROOM FOR 
COMPROMISE OR COMPLACENCY
The health and safety of our employees is 
paramount. It’s our top priority at all times – 
and our commitment to it is non-negotiable 
and absolute.

Tracked weekly, Lost Time Incident Frequency 
Rate (LTIFR) is a key measure of our safety 
performance. Our LTIFR for the year is shown 
on page 11 – while we’re pleased with our 
progress, we recognise that there’s no room 
for complacency. 

We also use other metrics to give us a broader 
and deeper insight into safety, such as days lost 
ratio and employer liability claims. Again, these 
are tracked weekly and regularly reviewed to 
monitor the impact of initiatives and training 
programmes. Both rates fell during the year. 

Regular tracking helps us identify areas where 
we’re doing well and also where we can do 
better, supporting our objective of continual 
improvement. For example, we encourage 
all employees to report anything they see 
which could be potentially hazardous or 
harmful, or could be improved. These incidents 
are reported as near-misses. The degree of 
reporting continued to rise during the year, 
demonstrating a good level of employee 
engagement and highlighting the passion 
that our people have to care for themselves 
and each other. 

Drivers make up a significant percentage of 
our workforce. These are dedicated and skilled 
individuals and we work hard to keep them 
safe. We track and monitor driving records, 
incidents and behaviours and regularly review 
the results – and we pay particular attention 
to the Collisions per Million Kilometres (CMK) 
metric as a measurement of our performance 
in these areas. 

21

Strategic reportGovernanceDirectors’ remuneration reportDirectors’ reportIndependent auditor’s reportAccountsWincanton plc Annual Report and Accounts 2018and career development. It is an opportune 
way to use and develop the skills of our 
talented colleagues, while enhancing local 
links and gaining a sense of giving back to the 
communities in which they live and work.

PROTECTING OUR ENVIRONMENT
We’re acutely aware of the impact our industry 
can have on the environment and we do all  
we can to minimise that impact. 

Our environmental policy is supported by 
an environmental management system 
which is cascaded throughout Wincanton, 
ensuring that all employees are fully aware 
of their roles and responsibilities. We have 
comprehensive sustainability plans in place for 
all our sites, depots and offices. These plans 
include projects designed to mitigate our 
environmental impact and ensure that 
we continue to move towards achieving 
our sustainability targets and our senior 
management team receives regular reports 
on progress.

A well-managed supply chain can play a key 
role in mitigating the impact of our customers’ 
activities as well as our own. So we share 
our knowledge and experience along the 
supply chain, for example, by identifying 
efficiencies, promoting collaborative working 
and by offering significant expertise and 
experience in managing environmentally 
sustainable logistics.

EXTERNAL REPORTING  
AND RECOGNITION
Safety award, CILT Annual award 2017
We won the 2017 Safety Award at the 
prestigious CILT Annual Awards. The CILT 
Annual Awards recognise achievement and 
reward the highest industry standards across 
Logistics and Transport. Our win in the Safety 
Award category highlights the achievements of 
our business and, more specifically, the success 
of our Sherburn site.

CORPORATE RESPONSIBILITY REPORT CONTINUED

Each driver is provided with a Wincanton 
Driver’s Handbook, which lays out all the 
information they need to work safely and 
professionally. It includes specific safety 
initiatives around driving and handling 
that we’ve created to keep our drivers and 
the public safe at all times. These include 
details on our EVADE vulnerable road user 
programme which provides important 
guidance on safeguarding pedestrians 
and cyclists. 

We’re equally proud of our non-driving 
colleagues. In our view, it’s essential to invest 
in equipment and training for all, regardless 
of role, to ensure we maintain our ‘best in class’ 
safety record. That means going further than 
providing the training required by regulation 
and legislation. 

Away from the cab, we provide an annual 
schedule of training on health and safety 
related topics, which is cascaded throughout 
our business sites and offices. We deliver 
regular Health, Safety and Environment training 
to our managers and implement initiatives 
through our Train the Trainer scheme to target 
key risk areas, with 1,775 trainers trained in the 
year. We also provide regular courses in risk 
assessment and accident investigation for first 
line managers. 

SUPPORTING OUR PEOPLE  
AND THEIR COMMUNITIES
Recognition is a key theme at Wincanton. 
We offer a range of rewards that reflect 
the contribution our employees make to 
the success of the Group, our industry and 
society in general. We provide many ways for 
employees to help us improve our business 
and performance, and to ensure we’re good 
neighbours by strengthening our links with 
local communities.

At every site we develop programmes 
that promote and encourage these links. 
Throughout the year we’ve organised a wide 
range of community-based activities from 
charity events to family fun days, each raising 
money for the range of good causes chosen  
by our employees.

We believe that being active in the community 
and sharing our expertise is integral to growing  
awareness of the logistics industry. Our  
colleagues enjoy volunteering their time as 
part of our school activity with young people 
across the UK, which consists of a tailored 
education programme of presentations and 
interactive sessions with students and staff. 
The programme also provides mentoring, 
road safety information, work experience 

OUR ENVIRONMENTAL PRINCIPLES
We use ten environmental principles to help us identify and manage any impact 
of our business on the environment:

1  Integrate
We integrate environmental considerations into key business decisions.

2  Develop
We develop progressive products and services to assist our customers to improve their 
environmental performance.

3  Management 
We ensure operational excellence and legal compliance through environmental 
management systems and employee training.

4  Measure
We monitor, measure and continuously improve our environmental performance.

5  Communicate
We communicate our progress to our customers, employees and investors.

6  Carbon emissions
We minimise the consumption of fossil fuels and associated emissions of carbon dioxide, 
and other greenhouse gases.

7  Resources
We minimise our consumption of non-renewable and environmentally sensitive resources.

8  Waste
We minimise the amount of waste produced through prevention, reuse and recycling.

9  Pollution
We prevent ground and water pollution and minimise emissions of airborne pollutants.

10  Communication
We minimise the negative impact of our activities on local communities and engage 
positively with them.

22

Strategic reportWincanton plc Annual Report and Accounts 2018 
Haulier of the year, motor  
transport awards 2017 
The Motor Transport Awards is an annual event 
which celebrates outstanding achievement in 
the road transport industry. Wincanton’s win in 
the ‘Haulier of the Year’ category acknowledges 
our recent successes as well as the outstanding 
quality of service in providing agile logistics 
solutions in the UK and Ireland.

Our environmental initiatives and the progress 
we’ve made in reducing our impact have 
been recognised by our customers and other 
stakeholder bodies.

Carbon Trust Standard
We’re proud to have held the Carbon Trust 
Standard since 2010 and value its recognition 
of the continuous and consistent reductions 
we’ve made to our carbon footprint. This is 
a particularly significant achievement in the 
context of our continuing growth.

CDP disclosure score
For 2017, we were again rated at ‘B minus’, 
indicating that we’re a company ‘managing 
carbon’. This score underlines the fact 
that we’ve gone beyond completing a 
full disclosure and being aware of our 
environmental issues, impacts and risks. 
It recognises that we’re implementing actions, 
policies and strategies to address these issues 
and have achieved carbon reduction figures 
that reflect this.

GREENHOUSE GAS EMISSIONS
We believe that continuous improvement 
and operational excellence is enhanced 
by robust environmental governance and 
management systems. 

Responsibility for our environment programme 
sits with our Health, Safety and Environment 
Committee (HSE). This is chaired by our Group 
HSEQ Director and attended by members 
of the Executive Management Team (EMT) – 
demonstrating the importance we place on 
our environmental strategy. 

Our environmental management system 
was reviewed and revised during 2017 and 
maintained its external certification, upgraded 
to the new ISO14001:2015 standard. 

The system provides monthly operational 
emissions performance across a range of 
indicators – enabling us to take prompt 
corrective actions and to identify and exploit 
improvement opportunities in each of our 
business sectors. 

From an emissions reduction perspective, we 
launched or implemented a number of key 
projects, including: completing upgrades to 
LED lighting at five sites; introducing a new 
fleet with enhanced cruise control, economy 
drive and predictive power train control 
features; and committing to our first electric 
vehicles on our two-man home delivery fleet. 
We’re also trialling 100% bio-diesel from waste 
and plan to introduce further natural gas 
vehicles during 2018.

Carbon emission information is prepared with 
reference to the Carbon Disclosure Standards 
Board (CDSB) Framework 1.1 and the GHG 
Protocol Corporate Standard for operational 
control. Carbon factors are per Defra/DECC 
conversion factors for company reporting 
2017, with both electricity generation and 
distribution emissions included as scope 2 
emissions. For all UK mainland operations 
where we have the supply contract, we 
purchase ‘green’ tariff electricity which 
complies with the market-based scope 2 
reporting requirements of the GHG protocol. 
However, we have reported electricity use 
at UK grid average for the purposes of this 
annual report.

We record energy and fuel use for managed 
supplies, which includes all supplies that are 
wholly or partially managed at sites operated 
by our teams, either for ourselves or our 
customers, irrespective of whether the fuel 
and/or energy is purchased by us directly. 
The sources of emissions include: road 
transport fuels; fuels for non-road transport 
uses; energy utilities for buildings; and fuel for 
business travel in Wincanton-driven vehicles. 
We also include consumption of fluorinated 
refrigerant gases as a scope 1 emission and 
have not excluded any emissions sources 
regardless of materiality.

We participate in the UK CRC Energy Efficiency 
Scheme and all CRC qualifying emissions are 
included in our scope 1 and 2 carbon emissions 
figures. We complied with the UK Energy 
Saving Opportunities Scheme (ESOS) original 
2015 deadline and utilised the costed energy 
saving measures in our internal environmental 
targets to 2020, to derive full value from the 
ESOS compliance process.

REDUCING OUR CARBON  
INTENSITY RATIO
We set absolute internal targets for carbon 
emissions reduction, and decouple emissions 
performance from business performance. 
However, as changes in our business activities 
directly affect our emissions, we use a carbon 
intensity measure to ensure we optimise our 
carbon efficiency.

Our carbon intensity is defined as total scope 
1 and 2 carbon emissions from managed 
supplies per unit of revenue, and our carbon 
intensity ratio for the year ended 31 March 2018 
was 315 tonnes of carbon dioxide equivalent 
(tCO2e) per £m of revenue. This is a reduction 
year on year because, while we’ve seen 
revenue growth, we’ve also reduced our 
energy and fuel use. There were also favourable 
variances in the UK carbon factors.

Emissions from managed 
supplies tonnes CO2e

2

Carbon emissions table
Carbon emissions (tCO2e)
Transport (scope 1)
Non-transport (scope 1 & 2)
Total emissions 
Carbon intensity (tCO2e/£m)

2017/181
308,227
58,874
367,101
315

2016/172
287,020
72,458
359,478
320

2015/162
308,352
84,938
393,290
345

2014/15
304,747
82,631
387,378
350

2013/14
293,557
94,856
388,413
355

1

1  Transport (Scope 1) 

2  Non-transport (Scope 1, 2) 

80%

20%

1  Figures correct as at the date of this report. 
2  Figures restated to adjust for re-verified data from previous years.

23

Strategic reportGovernanceDirectors’ remuneration reportDirectors’ reportIndependent auditor’s reportAccountsWincanton plc Annual Report and Accounts 2018FINANCIAL REVIEW

PERFORMANCE SUMMARY

Revenue (£m)
Underlying EBITDA (£m)
Underlying operating profit (£m)
Underlying operating margin (%)
Net financing costs (£m)
Underlying profit before tax (£m)
Amortisation of acquired intangibles (£m)
Exceptional items (£m)
Profit before tax (£m)
Income tax (£m)
Profit after tax (£m)
Underlying EPS (p)
Basic EPS (p)
Dividend per share (p)
Closing net debt (£m)

The Group has delivered 
strong revenue growth 
through a combination  
of new business wins  
and organic growth.

Tim Lawlor 
Chief Financial Officer

2018
1,171.9
64.8
52.9
4.5
(6.5)
46.4
(2.3)
(6.2)
37.9
(6.7)
31.2
30.8
25.2
9.9
(29.5)

2017
1,118.1
63.9
52.1
4.7
(10.6)
41.5
(2.2)
6.1
45.4
(3.4)
42.0
27.7
34.2
9.1
(24.3)

Change
4.8%
1.4%
1.5%
(20)bps

11.8%

11.2%

21.4%

The Directors present the results of the business on an underlying basis, excluding amortisation of acquired intangibles and exceptional items,  
the related tax and exceptional tax items, from operating profit, profit before tax and EPS where applicable, as they believe this better represents  
the performance of the business. A reconciliation of these measures to their statutory equivalent is shown in the table on page 27.

24

Strategic reportWincanton plc Annual Report and Accounts 2018The Group’s revenue of £1,171.9m in the year 
ended 31 March 2018 was 4.8% higher than 
the prior year (2017: £1,118.1m). This strong 
level of growth reflects the impact of new 
business commencing in the year as well as 
strong organic growth, particularly in Retail 
general merchandise within the Retail & 
Consumer sector.

Group underlying operating profit

2018

2017

2016

2015

2014

52.9

52.1

48.7*

46.2*

44.2*

30

35

40

45

50

55

(£m)

*  Excluding the results of Wincanton Records Management, 

which was disposed of in 2015/16.

Underlying operating profit grew by 1.5% to 
£52.9m, as a result of a strong performance 
in Retail & Consumer partly offset by weaker 
performance within certain transport related 
areas in Industrial & Transport and property-
related credits arising at the end of contract 
terms in the prior year. As a result, the 
underlying operating margin has reduced  
to 4.5% (2017: 4.7%).

NET FINANCING COSTS

Bank interest payable 
on loans
Interest receivable
Net interest payable
Unwinding of discount 
on provisions
Interest on the net 
defined benefit pension 
liability
Net financing costs

2018  
£m

2017  
£m

4.1
–
4.1

0.6

1.8
6.5

6.0
(0.1)
5.9

1.2

3.5
10.6

Net financing costs were £6.5m (2017: £10.6m), 
£4.1m lower year on year.

Bank interest payable on loans was £4.1m 
(2017: £6.0m), a reduction of £1.9m reflecting 
the maturity of the US Private Placement in 
November 2016, the repayment of the £25m 
Prudential/M&G UK Companies Financing Fund 
LP facility in July 2017 and the lower average 
borrowing rate on the remaining facilities.

The non-cash financing items total £2.4m 
(2017: £4.7m) and comprise the discount 
unwinding on the Group’s provisions for 
property and insurance claims, which has 
reduced primarily due to a change in the 
discount rate used for the property provision; 
plus the financing charge in respect of the 

defined benefit deficit, lower in the year 
because of a reduction in the opening 
pension deficit.

AMORTISATION OF ACQUIRED 
INTANGIBLES
Amortisation of acquired intangibles of £2.3m 
is consistent with the prior year of £2.2m and 
relates to the intangible asset recognised on 
the acquisition of a defence business in 2008. 
This asset has now been amortised in full.

EXCEPTIONAL ITEMS

Restructuring costs
Pension scheme liability 
management exercise
Other items
Net exceptional items

2018  
£m
(8.2)

2.0
–
(6.2)

2017  
£m
–

(0.9)
7.0
6.1

The Group has undertaken a restructuring 
programme in the year to ensure that the 
business is competitively positioned for the 
future. A charge of £8.2m is included as an 
exceptional charge for the year comprising 
principally of costs in relation to the exit of 
people and associated property costs.

The conclusion of the pension scheme liability 
management exercise initiated at the end of 
last year has resulted in a settlement gain of 
£1.8m together with a release of £0.2m due 
to actual costs of the exercise being lower 
than expected.

Other items in the prior year of £7.0m comprise 
non-cash gains of £4.6m recognised on 
the remeasurement of liabilities relating to 
disposed businesses; and the settlement  
of a claim against a supplier.

TAXATION

Underlying profit before 
tax (£m)
Underlying tax (£m)
Tax on amortisation of 
acquired intangibles (£m)
Exceptional tax (£m)
Tax as reported (£m)
Effective tax rate on 
underlying profit 
before tax (%)

2018

2017 

46.4
8.3

(0.4)
(1.2)
6.7

41.5
7.5

(0.4)
(3.7)
3.4

18.0% 18.0%

Underlying tax of £8.3m (2017: £7.5m) 
represents an effective tax rate of 18.0% 
(2017: 18.0%) on underlying profit before 
tax and is stated before tax credits of £0.4m 
(2017: £0.4m) in respect of the amortisation  
of acquired intangibles and exceptional tax  
of £1.2m (2017: £3.7m, comprising a £4.0m  
tax credit relating to previous years’ tax 
liabilities, offset by a tax charge of £0.3m  
on exceptional profit).

The total net deferred tax asset has reduced  
to £11.5m (2017: £17.2m), primarily as a result  
of the reduction in the pension deficit and  
the deferred tax asset thereon. 

PROFIT AFTER TAX AND EARNINGS 
PER SHARE
Profit after tax for the year is £31.2m 
(2017: £42.0m), the reduction of £10.8m due 
to exceptional items, a charge in the current 
year compared to a gain in the prior year, 
partly offset by improvements in underlying 
operating profit and financing costs.

Underlying EPS, which excludes from earnings 
amortisation of acquired intangibles and 
exceptional items, increased by 11.2% to 30.8p 
(2017: 27.7p). Basic EPS was 25.2p (2017: 34.2p) 
with the decrease again being explained by 
the exceptional items.

The calculation of these EPS measures is set out 
in Note 7 to the financial statements.

DIVIDENDS

Interim
Final (proposed)
Total

2018 
pence
3.27
6.63
9.90

2017 
pence
3.00
6.10
9.10

The Group’s policy is to show dividend 
growth broadly matched to the growth in 
underlying earnings.

In setting the dividend the Board considers  
a range of factors, including the Group’s 
strategy (including downside sensitivities),  
the current and projected level of distributable 
reserves and projected cash flows including 
cash payments to the pension scheme.

The Board has proposed a final dividend of 
6.63p per share relating to the year ended 
31 March 2018, an increase of 8.7% compared 
to the final dividend paid in respect of the year 
ended 31 March 2017.

Dividend payments of £11.6m (2017: £10.4m) 
in the year comprised the final dividend of 
6.1p per share relating to the period ended 
31 March 2017 and the 2018 interim dividend  
of 3.27p per share.

25

Strategic reportGovernanceDirectors’ remuneration reportDirectors’ reportIndependent auditor’s reportAccountsWincanton plc Annual Report and Accounts 2018 
 
 
FINANCIAL REVIEW CONTINUED

FINANCIAL POSITION
The summary financial position of the Group 
is set out below:

Non-current assets
Net current liabilities 
(excl. net debt)
Non-current liabilities 
(excl. net debt/pension 
deficit)
Net debt 
Pensions deficit (gross 
of deferred tax)
Net liabilities 

2018  
£m
136.0

2017  
£m
147.9

(136.4)

(149.8)

(33.1)
(29.5)

(34.8)
(24.3)

(49.5)
(112.5)

(78.4)
(139.4)

The reduction in net liabilities of £26.9m is 
represented by the profit after tax of £31.2m, 
the remeasurement of the pension deficit net 
of deferred tax of £11.4m, less dividends paid  
in the year of £(11.6)m and other movements  
in equity of £(4.1)m.

CASH FLOWS 
The Group’s cash flows can be summarised 
in the following table:

Underlying EBITDA
Net capital expenditure
Working capital
Tax
Net interest
Other items
Free cash flow
Pension recovery 
payment
Pension liability 
management exercise
Dividends
Own shares acquired
Net cash flow

2018  
£m
64.8
(14.0)
(8.3)
(4.0)
(4.1)
(9.4)
25.0

2017  
£m
63.9
(18.7)
6.5
(2.6)
(6.8)
(2.5)
39.8

(14.6)

(14.1)

(2.2)
(11.6)
(1.8)
(5.2)

–
(10.4)
(0.1)
15.2

The Group incurred a £(5.2)m net cash outflow 
(2017: £15.2m inflow) in the period, with a free 
cash inflow of £25.0m (2017: £39.8m), defined 
as the movement in net debt, before pension 
payments, dividends and the acquisition of 
own shares. 

Net capital expenditure was £14.0m 
(2017: £18.7m), reflecting our investment to 
support new business growth including £6.2m 
for specialist vehicles, £4.7m for warehouse 
fit out and £3.0m for new fleet on start-up 
contracts or renewals. The capital expenditure 
is net of cash receipts on sale of assets of £0.5m 
(2017: £0.5m).

The £8.3m outflow (2017: £6.5m outflow) on 
working capital in the year ended 31 March 
2018 is primarily due to working capital 
investment in mobilising new contracts 
started in the year.

26

The Group paid cash tax in the current year 
of £4.0m (2017: £2.6m). The cash tax payable 
continues to trend below the underlying 
charge due to the impact of tax relief on the 
pension deficit recovery payments made  
in the year and on share options exercised. 
This is expected to continue going forward.

The amount of cash interest paid, excluding 
fees, of £4.1m (2017: £6.8m) reduced in the 
year reflecting the lower average cost of debt 
following the repayment of two tranches of 
more expensive debt: the US Private Placement 
debt of £20m which matured in November 
2016; and the final element of the M&G debt  
of £25m which was repaid in July 2017.

Other cash outflows include payments in 
respect of exceptional charges, property 
provisions and share based payments. 
Approximately £4m was paid in respect of 
restructuring costs in the year. A cash outflow 
in respect of property provisions of £3.9m, 
compared to the prior year of £2.7m, the 
increase due to the settlement of a dilapidation 
claim in the second half. 

Free cash flow of £25.0m (2017: £39.8m) has 
been used to maintain the annual pension 
recovery payments of £14.6m (2017: £14.1m) 
and to pay equity dividends of £11.6m 
(2017: £10.4m). In addition, total payments of 
£2.2m were incurred in respect of the pension 
liability management exercise, including the 
transfer payments to the Scheme and the cost 
of running the exercise. The Group acquired 
850,000 shares during the year for a total 
payment of £1.8m to provide shares for the 
Employee Benefit Trust in respect of long term 
incentive plan commitments.

FINANCING AND COVENANTS

Closing net debt

2018

2017

2016

2015

2014

0

29.5

24.3

39.5

57.6

64.9

25

45

65

(£m)

The Group’s committed facilities at the end 
of the year were £141m (2017: £166m) and the 
headroom in these committed facilities to 
reported net debt at 31 March 2018 was £112m 
(2017: £142m). The Group also has additional 
operating overdrafts which provide day to  
day flexibility and amount to a further £8m  
in uncommitted facilities. 

In March 2018 the Group agreed an 
uncommitted £50m Receivables Purchase 
Facility with Santander UK Plc. This will allow 
the Group to access funds held within debtors 

earlier which will provide a flexible tool to 
manage working capital fluctuations.

Sterling and Euro pools are operated and 
whenever possible, surplus cash is netted 
against overdrafts.

Committed facilities

124

132

141

141

2021

2020

2019

2018

40

80

120

160

30

0

Closing net debt

(£m)

The Group’s facilities at 31 March 2018 comprise 
the syndicated main bank facility of £141m 
which amortises by £8.8m in October 2019, 
with a second equal amortisation at the four 
year anniversary in October 2020 before 
maturing in October 2021. The £25m facility 
with Prudential/M&G UK Companies Financing 
Fund LP was prepaid without penalty on 
14 July 2017 from cash generated in the period 
and from other facilities. 

The Group maintains a mix of hedging 
instruments (swaps) to give an appropriate 
level of protection against changes in interest 
rates. At the year end, £20m of debt was at 
fixed rates and the balance at floating rates.

Wincanton operates comfortably within its 
banking covenants, as summarised in the 
table below:

Covenant 
Adjusted net debt: 
EBITDA
Interest cover
Fixed charge cover

At 31 
March 
2018

0.81
17.8
2.5

Ratio

<2.75:1
>3.5:1
>1.4:1

PENSIONS
The Group operates a number of pension 
arrangements in the UK and Ireland.

Defined benefit arrangements
The Wincanton plc Pension Scheme (the 
Scheme) includes defined benefit sections 
which were closed to future accrual on 
31 March 2014.

The membership data split by key categories  
is as follows:

Deferred
Pensioners

2018
7,404
5,810
13,214

2017
8,030
5,883
13,913

At 31 March 2018, the Group is reporting an  
IAS 19 deficit of £49.5m (2017: £78.4m).

Strategic reportWincanton plc Annual Report and Accounts 2018 
 
The deficit has reduced due to a reduction in 
liabilities due to demographic assumptions, an 
increase in the market value of the investments 
and contributions received from the Group, 
being partly offset by an increase in liabilities 
due to an increase in the inflation rate 
assumption. The discount rate has remained 
at 2.6% in line with the prior year. On an IAS 19 
basis of measurement, each 0.1% increase in 
the rate decreases the liabilities of the Scheme 
by approximately £22m, however, due to the 
hedging in place, assets would also decrease  
by approximately £24m.

Over recent years, the Trustee has pursued 
a diversification of the investment portfolio 
as part of a de-risking strategy and the 
programme has continued in the year 
ended 31 March 2018. As at 31 March 2018 
the Scheme’s investment was split between 
42.4% in return-seeking assets and 57.6% in 
defensive assets. 

The interest and inflation rate risks facing 
the Scheme are hedged and the Trustee has 
increased the level of this hedge during the 
year to 100% of the Scheme’s assets. 

In conjunction with the Trustee, the Group 
also initiated a liability management exercise 
in the form of an Enhanced Transfer Value, 
whereby deferred members approaching 
retirement may choose to transfer their assets 
out of the Scheme in order to access the 
new flexible retirement options available. 
As a result of this exercise the Group has 

recognised an exceptional credit of £2.0m, 
being a settlement gain of £1.8m generated on 
completion of the exercise and £0.2m release 
due to a reduction in the costs associated 
with the exercise; together with an associated 
cash outflow to fund the enhanced transfer 
values; and a reduction in the pension liabilities 
(2017: exceptional cost of £(0.9)m, being the 
costs associated with making the transfer 
offer, including the provision of independent 
financial advice). As part of the exercise the 
Group paid top up payments to the Scheme 
of £1.5m resulting in a reduction in the deficit 
on an IAS 19 basis of £3.3m. The impact of the 
exercise on the assets, liabilities and deficit is 
shown in the table below:

Cash Equivalent Transfer Value
Liabilities extinguished
Deficit reduction
Group top up
Net gain on settlement

IAS 19
(24.3)
27.6
3.3
(1.5)
1.8

Discussions with the Trustee in respect of 
the triennial valuation as at 31 March 2017 
are continuing. These discussions are based 
on a Technical Provisions valuation (the “TP 
deficit”), which uses a more prudent set of 
assumptions than those used for the purpose 
of the IAS 19 balance sheet valuation. As a 
result the TP deficit is higher than the balance 
sheet deficit (the 31 March 2014 TP deficit 
was £195m compared with the balance sheet 

deficit of £110.9m) and the movements in the 
deficits over time may not be proportionate 
due to the different basis of calculation. 
The objective of the triennial process is to agree 
the valuation, an investment strategy for the 
Scheme assets, the Company’s annual deficit 
funding contribution, the recovery period for 
these payments and contingent protections 
for the Scheme. We expect to conclude the 
discussions with Trustees during the calendar 
year 2018.

The last triennial valuation of the Scheme, 
undertaken as at 31 March 2014, resulted in a 
deficit recovery payment plan with a baseline 
annual payment of £14.4m increasing by RPI 
each year through the recovery period to 
September 2024. The cash contribution made 
in the current year to fund the deficit was 
£14.6m which is after the deduction of certain 
administration costs paid directly by the Group 
as agreed with the Trustee.

Defined contribution arrangements
The Group’s defined contribution 
arrangements include the Retirement Savings 
Section including the Auto Enrolment section, 
and the Pension Builder Plan in the UK and 
a separate similar local scheme in Ireland. 
Active membership of these schemes was 
15,728 (2017: 15,524) in the year. The charge 
incurred for these arrangements totals £19.0m 
(2017: £17.9m).

ALTERNATIVE PERFORMANCE MEASURES
Alternative performance measures (APMs) are used by the Board in assessing the Group’s performance and are applied consistently from one 
period to the next. They therefore provide additional useful information for shareholders on the underlying performance and position of the Group. 
Additionally, underlying EPS is used as a key performance indicator for the share incentive schemes, including the Special Option Plan and Long Term 
Incentive Plan. These measures are not defined by IFRS and are not intended to be a substitute for IFRS measures.

The Group presents underlying EBITDA, operating profit and EPS which are calculated as the statutory measures stated before amortisation of 
acquired intangibles and exceptional items, including related tax and exceptional tax items where applicable. The table below reconciles the APMs  
to the statutory reported measures.

Revenue (£m)

EBITDA (£m)2

Operating profit (£m)

Operating margin (%)

Net financing costs (£m)

Profit before tax (£m)

Income tax (£m)

Profit after tax (£m)

Earnings per share (p)3

Dividend per share (p)

Closing net debt (£m)4

Amortisation 
of acquired 
intangibles

Exceptional 

items1 Underlying

Statutory

Amortisation 
of acquired 
intangibles

Exceptional 
items1

2018

–

–

2.3

0.2

–

2.3

(0.4)

1.9

–

6.2

6.2

0.5

–

6.2

(1.2)

5.0

1,171.9

1,118.1

64.8

52.9

4.5

(6.5)

46.4

(8.3) 

38.1 

30.8

9.9

(29.5)

70.0

56.0

5.0

(10.6)

45.4

(3.4)

42.0

34.2

9.1

–

–

2.2

0.2

–

2.2

(0.4)

1.8

–

(6.1)

(6.1)

(0.5)

–

(6.1)

(3.7)

(9.8)

Statutory

1,171.9

58.6

44.4

3.8

(6.5)

37.9

(6.7)

31.2

25.2

9.9

1  Note 3 and 6 to the financial statements provide further detail of exceptional items and also includes any tax releases/credits that are classed as exceptional.
2  EBITDA refers to operating profit before depreciation and amortisation and is reconciled in Note 2 to the financial statements.
3  Note 7 to the financial statements provides further detail of underlying earnings per share.
4  Net debt is the sum of cash and bank balances, bank loans and overdrafts and other financial liabilities. Note 26 to the financial statements provides a breakdown of net debt  

for the current and prior periods.

2017

Underlying

1,118.1

63.9

52.1

4.7

(10.6)

41.5

(7.5)

34.0

27.7

9.1

(24.3)

27

Strategic reportGovernanceDirectors’ remuneration reportDirectors’ reportIndependent auditor’s reportAccountsWincanton plc Annual Report and Accounts 2018Risk management system
The risk management system comprises three 
integrated risk management components: 
a working committee; risk registers at both 
Group and business unit level; and a control 
assessment programme.

Risk Management Committee
The Risk Management Committee (RMC) 
is an internal working committee set up to 
undertake second level assurance. The RMC 
maintains an up-to-date view on the current 
and prospective risks relevant to the Group 
and its macro environment, monitors the 
effectiveness of the control environment, 
and identifies improvements to controls and 
processes to reduce risks to the lowest level 
of acceptability.

The RMC reports to the EMT and Audit 
Committee on the current risk profile of the 
Group and progress on risk mitigation towards 
target risk levels set. The RMC seeks to meet 
at least five times per year and is comprised 
of business unit leadership and heads of 
support functions. This composition of senior 
management represents all significant risk 
areas within the Group, provides a collective 
oversight of the whole Group, and has the 
level of influence and empowerment to 
embed risk management behaviours and 
implement or change controls. The RMC has 
oversight responsibility for: Group, business 
and function risk registers; risk controls 
and processes (such as Group policies and 
business procedures); and business continuity 
arrangements throughout the Group, including 
disaster recovery. 

The Head of Internal Audit is invited to attend 
RMC meetings and provide updates on 
findings of reviews by Internal Audit to ensure 
any potential concerns or actions are shared 
so they can be addressed and monitored 
to completion.

During the course of the year there was a 
process to review the activities of the RMC. 
This process involved receiving the Audit 
Committee’s guidance on the scope of 
the RMC’s remit and an internal process to 
review the Group’s external legal contracts. 
To continue to enhance its role, further activity 
is planned during the course of the 2018/19 
financial year to develop the mechanisms to 
respond to adjustments in the Group’s priorities 
and business transformation. 

Risk registers
The Group has compiled and maintains a 
Group risk register of the significant risks at 
Group level. Risk registers specific to business 
unit and support functions are maintained 
by senior management responsible for those 
areas. Each risk register has been compiled 
following comprehensive assessment of the 
Group and its competitive environment. 
Appropriate responses and controls for all risks 
have been determined to, where possible, 
eliminate, but more usually mitigate, the impact 
and likelihood of the risks. 

Mitigation may include the introduction of 
additional controls, changes in procedures, 
increased insurance cover and commercial 
changes, along with other actions. The Group 
risk register is reviewed and monitored at 
each meeting of the RMC and if deemed 
necessary any amendments are submitted 
to the EMT for consideration, followed by the 
Audit Committee. 

Control assessment
The Group operates an annual programme 
which requires all business sites to complete 
an assessment on their application of controls 
and processes at site level. The completed 
assessments are submitted to Internal Audit 
who then follow up any issues of concern 
and may incorporate areas for further 
investigation into the scope of their Internal 
Audit assignments; and/or notify the RMC of 
any issues or remedial actions that need to 
be addressed and completed. Internal Audit 
report on the outcome of all submitted 
control assessments to each Audit Committee 
meeting throughout the year.

The RMC has continued to use the Risk 
Management Tool, which was implemented 
at the start of the financial year, to enable 
the business to assess and measure areas 
of risk. The RMC has further developed the 
Risk Management Tool to allow areas of best 
practice to be recognised which the business 
areas and operations, in turn, are encouraged 
to implement. The Risk Management Tool 
involves an element of peer review. This is seen 
as a key strength of the Risk Management 
Tool to enable multiple concurrent benefits: 
development of internal review skills within the 
Group; spread of knowledge of the Group’s 
business activities; and a further degree of 
independent measurement to support the 
Internal Audit function.

Strategic report

RISK REPORT

PRINCIPAL RISKS AND 
UNCERTAINTIES
This report, incorporated within the Strategic 
Report, sets out how the Group manages risk 
by explaining the controls, risk management 
system and the Group’s key principal risks 
and uncertainties. The key principal risks 
are those risks that are considered material 
and could have a significant impact on the 
Group’s activities. 

Risk governance
The Group faces a diverse range of risks and 
uncertainties which could have an adverse 
effect on its success if not managed. To address 
these the Group designed and embedded 
a risk management system to identify and 
monitor all relevant current and potential risks 
and uncertainties, and to develop mitigation 
plans to reduce the likelihood and/or impact  
of the risks to the lowest extent possible.

Operational oversight and application of risk 
management in the Group is the responsibility 
of the Executive Management Team (EMT). 
Independent oversight and monitoring is 
undertaken by the Board’s Audit Committee, 
on behalf of the Board. Both the EMT and Audit 
Committee consider risk as a routine agenda 
item at their respective meetings. This ensures 
that sufficient time is allocated to consideration 
of the effectiveness of risk management 
and identification of any areas that could be 
further strengthened. 

The internal risk and control environment is 
reviewed by Internal Audit throughout the 
year, and their findings are reported to the 
Audit Committee. The Audit Committee makes 
recommendations to the Board, or determines, 
within the remit of its authority, any remedial 
actions or alterations to the risk management 
and control environment to ensure it remains 
up-to-date and fit for purpose.

Risk responsibility and assessment
Ultimate responsibility for setting the Group’s 
risk appetite and the effective management  
of risk sits with the Board.

The Board believes that the risk management 
system provides sufficient information and 
assurance on the key risks and uncertainties 
faced by the Group and facilitates informed 
decision making on strategic, commercial  
and financial matters.

Acting within authority delegated by the 
Board, the Audit Committee has delegated 
oversight of risk management and the 
control environment, which is the day to day 
responsibility of the EMT.

Full details of the Audit Committee’s remit can 
be found in the Corporate Governance section 
on pages 40 to 42.

28

Wincanton plc Annual Report and Accounts 2018VIABILITY STATEMENT
In accordance with provision C.2.2 of the UK Corporate Governance Code 2014, the Directors 
have assessed the viability of the Group over a three year period to 31 March 2021, taking 
into account the Group’s current position and the potential financial and operational impact 
of the principal risks documented on pages 30 and 31 of the Annual Report, in severe but 
plausible scenarios. In making their assessment, the Board carried out a robust assessment  
of the principal risks facing the Group, including those that would threaten its business model, 
future performance, solvency or liquidity.

Scenarios tested include those impacting:

•  business continuity, including supplier failure and failure of an IT system;
•  growth and retention, including losses of rolling contracts and fixed contracts up for 

renewal, as well as a reduction in new wins;

•  operational performance, including contracts becoming onerous and labour costs 

increasing; and 

•  an increase in the pension deficit recovery payments. 

Reverse stress testing, involving sensitivity matrices, has also been performed. In severe but 
plausible scenarios, mitigating actions such as tighter cost controls or a reduction in dividend 
payments would need to be introduced.

The Directors have determined that a three year period to 31 March 2021 is an appropriate 
period over which to provide its Viability Statement. This is the period reviewed by the  
Board in our annual planning process, and for which forecasting assumptions are used. 
We believe that this presents the Board and readers of the Annual Report and Accounts  
with a reasonable degree of confidence over the longer term outlook.

Based on this assessment, the Board has a reasonable expectation that the Company  
and the Group will be able to continue in operation and meet liabilities as they fall due  
to 31 March 2021.

This statement was approved by the Board on 16 May 2018. 

On behalf of the Board

Raj Sharma
Company Secretary 
16 May 2018

Business continuity planning
The Group maintains detailed Business 
Continuity Plans (BCP) for all sites and offices, 
which are dovetailed with customers’ plans 
where necessary, to ensure an immediate 
and appropriate response to incidents. 
The rolling review of the quality and testing of 
all BCPs is undertaken at both site and Group 
level. The results of the review and testing 
programme are reported to the RMC, who 
maintain oversight on behalf of the EMT.

During the year, the Group has continued with 
its IT disaster recovery migration for business 
applications and services. Scenario testing was 
undertaken at disaster recovery sites and found 
to be effective. 

Whistleblowing 
The Group has in place a whistleblowing  
policy and procedure for all employees  
and other entitled individuals, to report 
concerns. The policy sets out the standards 
expected of all those it legally applies to 
and a clear procedure for raising concerns in 
strict confidence. The policy emphasises that 
anyone following the correct procedure and 
raising concerns in good faith is protected 
from recourse. 

In the event of a concern, employees are 
encouraged to first talk to their line manager 
or contact the HR team directly, if appropriate 
and they feel able to. When this is not possible 
or appropriate, employees can raise concerns 
directly to the Whistleblowing Officer or call an 
independent, external whistleblowing hotline, 
provided by Expolink. All calls to Expolink 
can be made on a named or anonymous 
basis. Reports of concerns are always treated 
in strict confidence and investigations are 
overseen, if appropriate, by the Company 
Secretary, the Chief Financial Officer and the 
Group HR Director. This ensures a thorough, 
fair and transparent process is undertaken 
and any actions are identified and addressed. 
A Whistleblowing Register is maintained and 
monitored, and is regularly reviewed by the 
Audit Committee. 

29

Strategic reportGovernanceDirectors’ remuneration reportDirectors’ reportIndependent auditor’s reportAccountsWincanton plc Annual Report and Accounts 2018RISK REPORT CONTINUED

PRINCIPAL RISKS OF THE GROUP

RISK AND IMPACT

CONTROLS AND MITIGATION

The Group has undertaken steps to mitigate the risk exposure of 
financial market movements and economic and political conditions. 
At the end of the year ended 2014, the Defined Benefit (DB) section 
of the Scheme was closed to future accrual to cap the risk. 
The Group maintains a strong working relationship with the 
Trustee, who is responsible for managing the fund and setting the 
investment strategy. The investment strategy is intended to reduce 
the investment risk through an appropriate level of matching 
between assets and liabilities in the Scheme. In the past two years, 
the level of hedging has been increased to significantly reduce the 
impact of inflation and interest rate movements. The Group and the 
Trustee engage high quality external fund managers and actuaries, 
and have separate legal, covenant and audit advisors to support and 
inform their decision making.
The Group and the Trustee have run liability management exercises 
to reduce the overall liability risk in the Scheme, including the 
Enhanced Transfer Value exercise concluded during the year ended 
31 March 2018. Further liability management exercises will be 
considered in future years.
The triennial valuation of the Scheme as at 31 March 2017 was 
commenced during the year ended 31 March 2018. The Group 
and the Trustee are ascertaining the appropriate recovery period 
and the level of annual contributions to the Scheme together with 
contingency plans to protect the Scheme in the event of adverse 
developments. The objective is to ensure the deficit is eliminated 
over a reasonable period whilst remaining at a level that is affordable 
and sustainable for the Group.

The Group has a strong and highly capable human resources 
function to monitor and maintain a high standard of recruitment  
and a regular appraisal process, based on key competencies. 
The Group constantly reviews and refreshes strategies and processes 
for recruitment and retention, such as the driver recruitment strategy 
which monitors driver vacancies and pipeline. The Group also 
has established relationships with preferred agencies to provide 
additional contingency. Talent and development are monitored 
and supported by a dedicated team to ensure people at all levels 
have access to our comprehensive training programme and 
development opportunities. Rewards are benchmarked to ensure 
they remain competitive and an annual employee engagement 
survey is undertaken and tracked as a KPI. The Board and Nomination 
Committee closely monitor and review the Board, executive and 
senior management strategies for succession planning and review 
the Group’s talent pool on a regular basis. The Group and the Board 
are mindful of the potential impact of Brexit on current and future 
employees, and are closely monitoring Brexit implications for 
emerging clarity.

The Group closely monitors its strategic and operational 
performance through its KPIs (set out on page 11) and regularly 
reviews: market opportunities and threats, sector strategies, the 
sales pipeline, business optimisation programmes, innovation and 
solutions development, bespoke business propositions, and the 
talent development and retention strategies.
In addition to annual customer surveys, the business maintains 
key customer account plans to consider current and future 
needs, alongside the tracking of service, financial and operational 
contractual performance.
As a supply chain organisation the Board, EMT, and leadership teams 
are closely monitoring the emerging developments on Brexit to 
determine if it could impact the market sectors the Group operates 
within, and any potential impact on customers and suppliers.

Pension deficit

The Group has a significant deficit on its Defined 
Benefit pension scheme. The employer contribution 
levels required to eliminate this deficit, and the 
pension deficit itself, are subject to: financial market 
conditions, global economic and political matters, 
demographic factors, expected future investment 
returns and the legal and regulatory environment. 
Significant adverse changes in any of those factors 
could materially alter the deficit value and lead to 
a material change in cash contributions, a change 
to the repayment period, regulatory intervention, 
or a combination thereof. These changes could 
impact the cash flow and profitability of the Group 
and restrict its ability to invest in the business, pay 
dividends and repay debt. 

Recruitment and 
retention

The inability to recruit and retain employees, from 
drivers and warehouse operatives to executive 
talent, is considered a principal risk. Failure to retain 
people with the right skills, competencies, values and 
behaviours needed to operate and grow the business 
would impact the long term success of the Group.

Significant changes 
to market sectors and 
operating environments

The Group provides services in a competitive and 
complex environment, with large and sophisticated 
customers within both its Industrial & Transport and 
its Retail & Consumer sectors. The Group faces into 
commercial pressures to renew and win business 
with acceptable levels of margin in order to deliver 
sustainable growth and returns. These pressures 
may stem from:
•  changes in customer appetite for 

outsourcing services;

•  strategic or behavioural changes in the competition, 

which may impact market pricing;

•  new disruptors, in particular the emergence of 

new technologies.

30

Strategic reportWincanton plc Annual Report and Accounts 2018Cyber security

IS infrastructure  
and systems

Legal and 
regulatory compliance

Key suppliers

Significant health, safety 
or environmental 
incident

RISK AND IMPACT

CONTROLS AND MITIGATION

The Group is acutely aware of the increasing 
prevalence of cyber security attacks in the digitalised 
world. Accordingly, cyber security is considered a 
principal risk and receives significant focus to ensure 
the protection of data and systems. A cyber attack 
could potentially impact the Group’s operational 
performance and reputation and could lead to 
penalties, fines and/or regulatory action.

The Group is highly dependent on a high quality IS 
infrastructure and IT systems to operate the business 
and that of its customers. It is therefore essential 
to business and operational performance that key 
systems, software and hardware are operational at all 
times. Failure of these for more than a short period 
could impact the ability of the Group to support its 
businesses and have contractual implications which 
could lead to penalties or other liabilities.

The Group must comply with an extensive range 
of regulation and legislation in order to provide 
its services and solutions. Failure to comply to the 
required standards could lead to significant legal and 
regulatory actions, sanctions, removal of licences 
and permits, penalties and fines, and could result 
in reputational damage to the Group and potential 
harm to its employees or property.

The nature of this risk is evolving rapidly. The Group mitigates 
the threats and risks through maintenance of an appropriate IS 
infrastructure. There are robust security processes and protocols in 
place and the Group operates strict access controls. A suite of policies 
and procedures are in place that cover all areas of system, software, 
usage, security and data protection. The Group undertakes monthly 
vulnerability scanning, regular audits, and an annual penetration 
test with follow up monthly reviews. In addition, the Group has 
established an Information Security Forum to focus on data 
protection and security across the business.

To mitigate this risk, the Group maintains robust BCPs which include 
remote servers and a disaster recovery site with a data centre for  
back up of central systems. The BCP is tested at least annually.  
The IS strategy contains a programme of phased refreshment of the 
IS estate on a priority basis and policies and procedures are in place 
to facilitate early detection and escalation of issues. The Group also 
maintains an extensive IS team to develop solutions and maintain  
the stability and security of the infrastructure.

Policies and procedures are in place throughout all areas of the 
Group to ensure systems, business and central operations all comply 
with relevant areas of legislation and compliance. The RMC maintain 
and monitor an internal legal and regulatory tracker to identify 
current and emerging legislation and determine any impact it 
may have to the Group and its policies, controls, communications 
and training that may need to be provided to Group employees. 
Second-line testing is undertaken by central functions to review 
the operation of controls and their effectiveness, including annual 
review of Group policies internally as well as a second review by 
external advisers.

As a large supply chain organisation, the Group 
is reliant on strong and reliable relationships with 
key suppliers and has obligations to comply with 
the Modern Slavery Act 2015. Failure to comply 
with regulations and have robust contractual 
arrangements with its largest suppliers could have 
significant financial and reputational impacts on the 
Group and its business performance.

The Group mitigates these risks through well established financial 
and internal control processes managed by central and operational 
finance teams and a large and experienced Procurement function. 
The Group reviews the financial stability and suitability of suppliers 
and requires they adhere to the Group’s policies and ethical 
standards. Regular supplier account management meetings take 
place to review performance. As noted above any potential Brexit 
impact is being closely monitored.

The Group operates in environments which have 
the potential to be hazardous to people or property 
if not actively managed. A failure to manage these 
risks properly could result in injury or death of people 
and/or damage to property and the environment. 
Should an event occur it could lead to regulatory 
action, fines, withdrawal of licences, site closures and 
damage to the Group’s reputation. All of which have 
the potential to impact the Group’s ability to win and 
do business.

The Group has detailed health and safety procedures and processes 
in place and employs health and safety teams at all business 
locations. The local team and operations are then monitored by a 
second-line central health and safety team. The Group undertakes 
regular training and assessment programmes, monitors business 
records and completion of risk self-assessments, analyses all ‘near 
miss’ reporting and undertakes audits and investigations if felt 
necessary. Health, safety and environmental data and reporting  
are provided to business management and leadership to manage 
and achieve target business performance.

31

Strategic reportGovernanceDirectors’ remuneration reportDirectors’ reportIndependent auditor’s reportAccountsWincanton plc Annual Report and Accounts 2018THE BOARD

Stewart Oades

Adrian Colman

Interim Chairman
Interim Chairman of the Nomination Committee, Member of the  
Audit Committee and Remuneration Committee
Stewart became a Non-executive Director of Wincanton in November 2014.  
He was appointed as the Senior Independent Director in July 2015 and became 
the Interim Chairman in September 2017 following the sudden death of Steve 
Marshall. Stewart is currently a Non-executive Director of LCV Hire Solutions 
and John Good & Sons Limited and is Chairman of Cygnia Logistics Ltd. He was 
formerly a Non-executive Director of Palmer & Harvey plc until January 2017 and 
also held the positions of President of the Freight Transport Association (FTA) 
for four years until 2013, Non-executive Director of MW Brands until March 2016 
and Clipper Group plc until 2011. Prior to these appointments, Stewart was Chief 
Executive of Christian Salvesen plc and held a number of senior posts at Exel plc.

Chief Executive Officer
Nomination Committee member
Adrian was appointed Chief Executive Officer in August 2015, having been the 
Group Finance Director from January 2013 to 31 July 2015. Adrian was formerly 
Finance Director with Psion plc, an international technology business, through to 
its acquisition by Motorola Solutions, Inc. in October 2012. Prior to joining Psion, 
Adrian was Chief Financial Officer of London City Airport and before that Financial 
Controller and Head of Investor Relations at QinetiQ Group plc.

Tim Lawlor

Chief Financial Officer
Tim Lawlor joined Wincanton in September 2015 as the Chief Financial Officer 
and an Executive Director on the Board. Tim was previously the Director of 
Finance and Strategy with Serco Group plc, the international service company, 
where he also held a number of senior operational and group roles. He was 
a Non-executive Director and Audit Committee Chairman of the Institute of 
Directors until December 2015. Prior to Serco, Tim was Group Financial Controller 
at Sea Containers Limited. Tim is a Chartered Accountant.

32

GovernanceWincanton plc Annual Report and Accounts 2018Martin Sawkins

Paul Dean

Independent Non-executive Director 
Remuneration Committee Chairman, and member  
of the Audit Committee and Nomination Committee
Martin became a Non-executive Director of Wincanton in July 2012. Martin 
is also a Non-executive Director of Scapa Group plc and was appointed as a 
Non-executive Director of Africa Exclusive Limited in August 2016. He previously 
held the position of Group HR Director of Rentokil Initial plc until December 
2015. Martin has spent his career in plc and private equity environments and has 
previously been the Group HR Director at HomeServe plc and The AA Limited, 
and HR Director at Centrica Home and Road Services. Prior to these roles Martin 
held a number of senior positions in HR and operations at UEF Limited, Bridon plc, 
British Aerospace and United Biscuits.

Independent Non-executive Director 
Audit Committee Chairman and member of the 
Nomination Committee and Remuneration Committee
Paul became a Non-executive Director of Wincanton in February 2015 and  
was appointed Chairman of the Audit Committee in July 2015. He is currently 
a Non-executive Director and Audit Committee Chairman of Focusrite plc, 
Porvair plc and Polypipe plc, and was appointed Senior Independent Director 
of Focusrite plc in April 2014 and Polypipe plc in May 2015. Paul is a Trustee and 
director of two charities, Beanstalk and The Oxford Trust. Prior to these roles  
he held the position of Group Finance Director of Ultra Electronics Holdings plc 
and Foseco plc. Paul is a Chartered Management Accountant.

David Radcliffe

Gill Barr

Independent Non-executive Director 
Member of the Audit Committee, Nomination Committee 
and Remuneration Committee
David became a Non-executive Director of Wincanton in July 2012. He is currently 
Chief Executive of Hogg Robinson Group plc, an international corporate services 
organisation, where David has spent most of his career.

Independent Non-executive Director
Member of the Audit Committee, Nomination Committee 
and Remuneration Committee
Gill became a Non-executive Director of Wincanton in September 2017. Gill is 
currently a Non-executive Director of PayPoint plc and N Brown Group plc,  
a Trustee Director of Willis Towers Watson’s master trust, Lifesight Ltd. She was 
previously a Non-executive Director of Morgan Sindall plc from 2004 to 2012. 
She was Group Marketing Director of The Co-operative Group from 2011 to 
2014, and was previously Marketing Director of John Lewis. Gill spent seven 
years at Kingfisher plc where she held a variety of senior marketing, business 
development and strategy roles.

33

Strategic reportGovernanceDirectors’ remuneration reportDirectors’ reportIndependent auditor’s reportAccountsWincanton plc Annual Report and Accounts 2018INTERIM CHAIRMAN’S INTRODUCTION TO CORPORATE GOVERNANCE

Ensuring appropriate governance 
and controls are in place to support 
strategic delivery
During the year the Board has continued to 
focus on the development and practice of 
good governance throughout the whole 
organisation and has remained compliant with 
the UK Corporate Governance Code (the Code).

The Board has reviewed and monitored the 
Group’s performance to ensure that: 

•  sound internal controls and financial 

and regulatory monitoring are in place;
•  the Group has adequate cyber and data 

security in place given the implementation 
of General Data Protection Regulations 
(GDPR); and

•  the Group leads the implementation 
and promotion of vital health and 
safety initiatives to keep our people and 
stakeholders safe.

There have been two main changes in 
board personnel this year with more change 
expected in the near future. Following the 
sudden and unexpected death of Steve 
Marshall, I have been appointed Interim 
Chairman whilst a process is completed to 
appoint a permanent successor. In September 
2017, the Board welcomed the appointment 
of Gill Barr as a Non-executive Director. 
Her biography can be found on page 33. 

As stated in our Annual Report last year, we 
undertook our first external Board evaluation 
using Condign Board Consulting Limited. 
The purpose of the external evaluation was to 
gain independent appraisal and insight on the 
effectiveness and performance of the Board, 
its Committees and the Directors. The review 
concluded that the Board operates in a very 
functional, highly collegiate way which is 
effective. This year, the Board has sought to 
make incremental progress to enhance its 
functioning in a year which has seen change  
in its membership.

With the Executive Directors well embedded 
and a strengthened management team 
appointed during 2016 and 2017, the Board 
has been focused on strategic direction, which 
included review of its appetite for risk and 
ensuring appropriate governance and controls 
are in place to support strategy delivery and 
aspirations for growth in the business and 
operating environment. Good governance 
helps the Board address challenges that arise 
internally and externally, and enables the Board 
to undertake active stewardship of the Group 
to ensure it remains alert, agile and prepared. 

Looking into the new financial year, the 
Board will be monitoring developments in 
governance that propose changes to executive 
remuneration, reporting and strengthening 
the consideration of broader stakeholders. 
As stated in our Annual Report last year, 
the Board has reviewed and authorised the 
publication of our gender pay reporting which 
is now available on our website.

Following my introduction, in this Governance 
section of the Annual Report you will find 
the Corporate Governance report, the 
Nomination Committee report and the report 
from the Chairman of the Audit Committee. 
The Directors’ Remuneration Report 
includes the report of the Remuneration 
Committee Chairman.

Finally, as the Chair of the Board, I would 
like to remind shareholders that the Board 
welcomes engagement and dialogue with its 
shareholders and we look forward to seeing 
you at the forthcoming AGM. Alternatively, 
you can get in touch with us via our 
Company Secretary.

Stewart Oades
Interim Chairman  
16 May 2018

34

GovernanceWincanton plc Annual Report and Accounts 2018The Board encourages a culture of strong 
governance across the business, and continues 
to adopt the principles of good governance and 
adhere to the requirements of the UK Corporate 
Governance Code. 

The Board is collectively responsible to the Company’s 
shareholders for creating and preserving the long 
term success and performance of the business. 
The key Principles of the Code are outlined below:

LEADERSHIP

The Board provides leadership either directly or through  
the operation of its Committees. The Board sets the  
strategic objectives of the Company and actively monitors 
the Company’s progress. 

READ MORE ON PAGE 36

EFFECTIVENESS

ACCOUNTABILITY 

The Board and its Committees have the appropriate balance 
of skills, experience, independence and knowledge of the 
Company to enable them to discharge their respective duties 
and responsibilities effectively. 

The Board should present a fair, balanced and 
understandable assessment of the Company’s position  
and its prospects. The Board is responsible for determining 
the Company’s risk appetite. 

READ MORE ON PAGE 37

READ MORE ON PAGE 40

REMUNERATION

RELATIONS WITH SHAREHOLDERS

The Board is responsible for a formal and transparent 
procedure for developing policy on executive remuneration.

The Board as a whole has responsibility for ensuring that  
a satisfactory dialogue with shareholders takes place.

READ MORE ON PAGE 43

READ MORE ON PAGE 38

35

Strategic reportGovernanceDirectors’ remuneration reportDirectors’ reportIndependent auditor’s reportAccountsWincanton plc Annual Report and Accounts 2018CORPORATE GOVERNANCE REPORT

The UK Corporate Governance Code
As a listed company on the London Stock 
Exchange the Company is required to comply 
with the principles and provisions set out in 
the Code in force at the date of this report. 
The Board is committed to the principle of full 
compliance and is satisfied that the Company 
has complied with all of the requirements of 
the Code during the year.

COMPLIANCE STATEMENT
The Group remains committed to maintaining 
the highest standards of corporate governance. 
All reports in the Governance section and 
Directors’ Remuneration report have been 
prepared in accordance with the Code that 
applies to this accounting period.

Throughout the year ended 31 March 2018, the 
Board considers they, and the Company, have 
complied with all of the provisions of the Code.

BOARD LEADERSHIP
Role
The Company is led and controlled by the 
Board of Directors (shown on pages 32 to 
33), who are collectively responsible for 
the long term success of the Company 
and the endorsement and application of 
corporate governance.

Decision-making
The Board has a formal Schedule of 
Matters reserved for their decision-making. 
Such matters include Group strategy and 
structure, governance and regulatory 
compliance, financial reporting, major 
capital commitments, major contracts and 
agreements, internal controls, significant 
remuneration changes, stakeholder 
engagement, and material corporate 
transactions (including acquisitions 
and disposals).

The Schedule of Matters Reserved sets out 
the parameters of each matter and limitations 
delegated to Board Committees and a 
sub-committee of the Board, the Finance 
Committee. The Finance Committee is an 
ad-hoc executive management committee, 
authorised to approve day to day operational 
matters within limits and restrictions 
determined by the Board.

The Schedule is reviewed annually to ensure it 
remains fit for purpose and sets the parameters 
for management and expectation for 
internal controls.

Directors’ duties
The powers and duties of the Directors are 
determined by legislation and the Company’s 
Articles of Association. Directors are required 
to act in good faith in a way that they consider 
would be most likely to promote the success of 
the Company for the benefit of shareholders as 
a whole. In doing so, the Directors are required 
to have regard (amongst other matters) to:

•  the likely consequences of any decision in the 

long term;

•  the interest of the Company’s employees;
•  the need to foster business relationships with 

suppliers, customers and others;

•  the impact of the Company’s operations on 

the community and the environment;

•  the desirability of the Company to maintain 
a reputation for high standards of business 
conduct; and

•  the need to act fairly towards all shareholders 

of the Company.

In addition to their statutory duties, the 
Directors must ensure that the Board as a 
whole focuses effectively on all areas of their 
responsibility. The Board considers all such 
areas within routine agenda matters at each 
Board meeting.

Roles of Chairman and  
Chief Executive Officer
The roles of the Chairman and Chief Executive 
Officer are separate and performed by different 
individuals. A responsibility statement for 
each role has been set out and adopted by 
the Board.

The Interim Chairman, Stewart Oades, is 
primarily responsible for the operation of 
the Board and for ensuring that its strategic 
and supervisory role is achieved. He is an 
independent Non-executive Interim Chairman, 
deemed independent on appointment and 
remains independent in accordance with 
the Code.

The Chief Executive Officer, Adrian Colman, 
is responsible for the day to day running of 
the business which includes implementation 
of the strategy, decisions made by the Board 
and operational management of the Group 
supported by his Executive Management 
Team (EMT).

Executive Management Team (EMT)
The EMT comprise the senior leadership team 
that report directly to the Chief Executive 
Officer and have management responsibility 
for the business operations and support 
functions. The EMT meet monthly and relevant 
matters are reported to Board meetings by 
the Chief Executive Officer and, as appropriate, 
the Chief Financial Officer and other 
EMT members.

Senior Independent Director
The position of Senior Independent Director 
has been temporarily vacated as Stewart 
Oades was appointed to the position of 
Interim Chairman following the sudden 
death of Steve Marshall in September 2017. 
Following the completion of the process 
to appoint a permanent Chairman, it is the 
Board’s intention that the position of Senior 
Independent Director is then to be fulfilled by 
an independent Non-executive Director of 
the Board. The role of the Senior Independent 
Director is to act as a sounding board for the 
Chairman and perform an intermediary role to 
other Directors, where necessary. The role leads 
the appraisal and review of the Chairman’s 
performance and is available to shareholders 
if they have reason for concern that contact 
through the normal channels of the Chairman 
and Chief Executive Officer has failed to resolve.

Non-executive Directors
All of the Non-executive Directors were 
deemed independent on appointment and 
continue to be independent in accordance 
with the Code. They were each appointed 
on the basis of their calibre and experience 
and provide diversity through their skills, 
background and qualifications. Each Non-
executive Director has worked at director 
level in a variety of disciplines and commercial 
environments, similar sized organisations and 
regulated environments. The Board believes 
this enables them to collectively add value 
and provide independent oversight and 
challenge across all corporate and commercial 
aspects with their contributions and 
external perspective. 

Each Non-executive Director is appointed 
for an initial fixed term of three years, subject 
to annual re-election by shareholders. 
Their appointment term may be renewed by 
mutual agreement with due regard to the 
Code, their performance and contribution, and 
their ongoing independence.

Non-executive Directors are expected to: 
scrutinise, measure, review and challenge 
the performance of the EMT; assist in the 
development of Group strategy; review the 
Group financial information and performance; 
ensure systems of internal control and risk 
management are appropriate and effective; 
review the relationship with the External 
Auditor within the Audit Committee; and 
review the remuneration of, and succession 
planning for, the Board.

Last year, the Chairman and Non-executive 
Directors met once without the Executive 
Directors being present.

36

GovernanceWincanton plc Annual Report and Accounts 2018Board Committees
There are three Committees of the 
Board, an Audit Committee, Nomination 
Committee, and Remuneration Committee. 
Each Committee has terms of reference 
set by the Board, which are reviewed 
annually and made available on the Group’s 
website (https://www.wincanton.co.uk/
investors/governance/board-committees/). 
Membership of each Committee is determined 
by the Board on the recommendation of the 
Nomination Committee and in consultation 
with the appropriate Committee Chairman. 
The membership, role and duties discharged 
in the year ended 31 March 2018 for each 
Committee are set out in their respective 
Committee reports that follow.

Meetings attendance  
The attendance of the Directors is recorded 
in the table below. It is acknowledged that 
there may be unforeseen circumstances from 
time to time which could prevent a Director 
from attending. In such circumstances the 
Director would be expected to review the 
meeting papers and provide comments 
to the Chairman, Committee Chairman or 
Company Secretary to ensure they are raised 
at the meeting. 

During the 2018 financial year the Board held 
ten scheduled Board meetings. The table 
below sets out the attendance of the Directors 
at the scheduled Board meetings during the 
year under review:

The Directors were provided with appropriate 
documentation approximately one week in 
advance of each Board or Committee meeting 
during the year. For each Board meeting the 
papers include a trading update, and reports 
on human resources, health and safety, 
regulatory and governance matters, financial 
performance, and papers where a decision or 
approval is required.

Members of the EMT, and in some cases direct 
reports of the EMT, are invited to attend at 
least one Board meeting each year to present 
an update on the performance and future 
focus areas of their respective functions or 
business area.

Board changes
There were two changes to the Board this 
year. Steve Marshall’s sudden death resulted in 
the appointment of Stewart Oades as Interim 
Chairman on 1 October 2017. A selection 
process for a permanent Chairman is being 
undertaken by the Company. 

On 15 September 2017 the Board was pleased 
to welcome the appointment of Gill Barr as a 
Non-executive Director and member of the 
Audit Committee, Remuneration Committee 
and Nomination Committee. Her biography  
is available on page 33. 

Board Meetings 
Attended/Scheduled
5/5
10/10
10/10
10/10
10/10
3/4
10/10
10/10

Audit Committee
Attended/Scheduled
–
3/3
3/3
3/3
3/3
0/2
–
–

Remuneration 
Committee
Attended/Scheduled
2/2
5/5
5/5
5/5
5/5
1/2
–
–

Nomination 
Committee
Attended/Scheduled
3/3
6/6
5/6
6/6
6/6
3/3
6/6
–

Steve Marshall1
Paul Dean
Stewart Oades
David Radcliffe
Martin Sawkins
Gill Barr2
Adrian Colman
Tim Lawlor

1  Steve Marshall’s appointment as Chairman legally ended on 29 September 2017 following his sudden death. 
2  Gill Barr was appointed as a Non-executive director on 15 September 2017. 

In accordance with the Code six of the 
Directors, being eligible, will put themselves 
forward for annual re-election at the 
Company’s AGM on 28 June 2018. Gill Barr will 
put herself forward for election as a Non-
executive Director following her appointment 
on 15 September 2017.

BOARD EFFECTIVENESS
Performance review
In the normal course of the Board’s operation, 
its Committees and each Director participate 
in an annual performance evaluation process. 
In respect of the year ended 31 March 2018 the 
evaluation process could not be completed 
due to the sudden death of Steve Marshall. It is 
the Board’s intention that, on the appointment 
of a permanent successor, the process of 
annual performance evaluation process be 
re-established. 

All of the Directors are fully committed to their 
roles and to their statutory and fiduciary duties. 
Over the course of the year the Board received 
briefings and presentations from key members 
of the management team. The Board also held 
two meetings at business sites in Wigan and 
Sheffield, to receive business presentations 
from local management teams, and to observe 
and engage with colleagues working in site 
facilities. The site visits enable the Board to gain 
a deeper insight and understanding of the 
business and in particular customer contracts 
and operations.

Outside of meetings the Board members are 
also given opportunities to attend further 
business sites and visits are facilitated by the 
Company Secretary.

These additional activities help to ensure that 
the full Board has a sound understanding of 
the business and its operations, to enable it to 
provide appropriate oversight and challenge 
to the EMT.

Other directorships
The Interim Chairman and Non-executive 
Directors hold appointments as directors 
on a small number of other companies, as 
detailed in their biographies on pages 32 to 
33. It is considered the Interim Chairman and 
Non-executive Directors allocate sufficient 
time and commitment to fulfil their duties 
to the Company.

The Board acknowledges that Executive 
Directors may wish to undertake external 
non-executive director roles outside of 
the Company. It is recognised that such 
opportunities broaden their development, 
widen their commercial experience and so 
benefit the Company. To protect the interests 
of the Company each Executive Director is 
restricted to one non-executive role at any  
one time. During the year and to the date  
of this report no Executive Director held  
any external appointments. 

37

Strategic reportGovernanceDirectors’ remuneration reportDirectors’ reportIndependent auditor’s reportAccountsWincanton plc Annual Report and Accounts 2018 
RISK MANAGEMENT
The Board is ultimately responsible for the 
Group’s systems of risk management and 
internal control and reviews their effectiveness 
on a regular basis throughout the year.

The Group’s systems and controls are designed 
to ensure that the Group’s exposure to 
significant risk is reduced and mitigated to 
the extent possible, with acknowledgement 
that not all risk can be eliminated. Full details 
of the Group’s risk management systems and 
processes were set out earlier, in the Risk Report 
on pages 28 to 31.

The Group’s Internal Audit function 
independently reviews and tests the 
effectiveness of the internal controls and risk 
management through an annual Internal Audit 
programme. Full details of the Group’s Internal 
Audit function and performance are set out 
in the Audit Committee report starting on 
page 40.

ANNUAL GENERAL MEETING
The AGM, scheduled this year for 28 June 2018, 
provides an opportunity for shareholders to 
receive the financial results for the financial year, 
engage with the Board, receive an update on 
the current performance, and ask questions 
during the meeting. Shareholders also have the 
opportunity at the AGM to meet the Auditor 
and the Company Secretary.

Stewart Oades 
Interim Chairman 
16 May 2018

CORPORATE GOVERNANCE REPORT CONTINUED

Conflicts of interest
The Board monitors and reviews potential 
conflicts of interest on a regular basis and 
considers any situational conflicts at each Board 
meeting. Where any conflict arises the Board 
considers and authorises the reported actual 
or potential conflict in accordance with the 
provisions contained in the Company’s Articles 
of Association.

Directors indemnity and insurance
Directors are ultimately responsible for 
the operation, performance and decision-
making of the Company. In doing so, they are 
exposed to potentially significant personal 
liability under criminal or civil law and the UK 
Listing, Prospectus, Disclosure Guidance and 
Transparency Rules, which include penalties 
such as private or public censure, fines and/
or imprisonment.

In line with normal market practice, it is 
considered in the Company’s best interests to 
protect the Directors from the consequences 
of innocent errors or omissions. Accordingly, a 
Directors’ and Officers’ liability insurance policy 
is maintained at the Company’s expense and 
was in place throughout the year. The policy 
provides indemnity to Group employees 
that serve as directors or officers of any 
Group company, as recommended by the 
Code, which includes the Board of Directors. 
This insurance policy would not provide cover 
in the event that a Director or officer had 
knowingly acted fraudulently or dishonestly.

Board support and advice
The Company provides the Directors with 
access to independent professional advice at 
the Company’s expense, as and when required. 
In addition, all Directors have unfettered 
access to the advice and services of the 
Company Secretary.

SHAREHOLDERS AND 
STAKEHOLDERS
Shareholder engagement
The Company has continued throughout 
the year to maintain effective dialogue with 
shareholders to ensure that the strategy and 
business model is understood, and any queries 
are dealt with promptly and constructively. 
Regular contact with institutional shareholders, 
fund managers and analysts is conducted 
through meetings with the Chief Executive 
Officer and Chief Financial Officer. Brokers’ 
reports and analysts’ briefing notes are 
regularly distributed to all Directors. The Board 
receives updates on feedback raised by 
institutional shareholders, fund managers and 
analysts, to enable the Directors to form a view 
of the priorities and concerns of stakeholders. 
In addition, the Chairman and Committee 
Chairman are available to engage with major 
institutional shareholders from time to time.

Communications with shareholders
The Group’s website contains up to 
date information for shareholders and 
other stakeholders, such as share price, 
announcements, circulars, press releases, 
current and historic Annual Report and 
Accounts, corporate governance information 
and shareholder documentation.

Shareholders can elect how they receive 
communications from the Company. 
Electronic communications are endorsed by 
the Board as the most efficient communication  
method and one which also helps the Group 
reduce its environmental impact and costs. 
Accordingly, all shareholders are encouraged 
to receive communications electronically, 
by contacting the Company’s registrars, 
Computershare. Contact details and telephone 
numbers can be found on the Company’s 
website (https://www.wincanton.co.uk/
investors/shareholder-information).

Employees
On 31 March 2018 the Group employed 17,726 
people in the United Kingdom (UK) and 
Republic of Ireland (ROI), of which 14,628 are 
men and 3,098 are women. The average age 
of the Group’s employees is 42.6 years. Of all 
2,571 management level employees, 1,967 are 
men and 604 are women.

Details of the Group’s approach to equality, 
fairness and diversity are set out in the 
Corporate Responsibility Report on pages  
20 to 23.

Stakeholder engagement
Throughout the year, the Directors and senior 
managers meet with a range of external 
stakeholders to discuss the Group’s position on 
a range of business, policy and public interest 
issues and to seek stakeholders’ views.

38

GovernanceWincanton plc Annual Report and Accounts 2018NOMINATION COMMITTEE REPORT

NOMINATION COMMITTEE REPORT
Membership
The Nomination Committee comprises 
the Interim Chairman, the Chief Executive 
Officer and the four Non-executive Directors. 
The Interim Chairman is the Interim 
Nomination Committee Chairman.

Attendance at the Committee’s meetings are 
set out on page 37.

Role of the Nomination Committee
The Board has delegated oversight of the 
leadership needs and succession planning 
for the Board and EMT to the Nomination 
Committee, to ensure the Group has the 
best talent to perform effectively now and 
in the future.

Committee responsibilities
The Nomination Committee’s remit, which 
is set out in its terms of reference, includes 
responsibility for:

•  review of the structure, size and composition 
of the Board and its Committees, and making 
recommendations to the Board on any 
desired changes;

•  review of the succession plans for the 

Executive Directors and EMT;

•  the appointment procedure for new 
Directors, using external consultants;
•  recommendations for appointments 

of Directors;

•  preparation of role specifications, including 

assessment of the time commitment 
expected and the need for availability at short 
notice for non-executive roles;

•  review of the annual performance evaluation 

outcomes for areas under its remit; and

•  review of Directors’ external commitments 

and time available to discharge their 
responsibilities effectively.

Before a Director is appointed, the Committee 
evaluates the balance of skills, knowledge, 
experience and diversity of the Board to 
ensure that new appointments complement 
or address gaps in any of these areas. 
The Committee ensures the selection process 
is rigorous and transparent and appoints  
a professional external agent. Candidates  
from a wide range of backgrounds that 
meet the specification are considered and 
all appointments are made entirely on merit, 
with due regard to the benefits of diversity on 
the Board, which includes but is not limited 
to gender.

Activities in the year ended  
31 March 2018
During the year the Committee undertook  
the following activities:

•  reviewed financial year reporting matters 

and disclosures;

•  reviewed the Company’s succession 

plan for the Board following the external 
evaluation results;

•  reviewed the Company’s succession plans  

for the EMT;

•  appointed an external recruitment firm to 
support the selection processes for a Non-
executive Director and recommended the 
appointment of Gill Barr to the Board;
•  appointed an external recruitment firm 
to support the selection processes for a 
permanent Chairman;

•  reviewed the time commitment and conflict 
of interest declarations of the Directors; and

•  reviewed the Committee’s terms 

of reference.

As part of the external evaluation of the 
Board and its Committees, the operation and 
performance of the Committee was assessed 
and it was agreed that the Committee has 
continued to operate effectively and in 
accordance with its remit.

Composition of the Board
The Committee reviews the composition of 
the Board and its Committees on an ongoing 
basis to ensure there is appropriate balance 
and diversity in the skills and experience of the 
membership and there are no gaps.

The Board considers the current membership 
balance of Executive Directors and Non-
executive Directors is the right blend of 
commercial and governance experience, 
independence and challenge and the diverse 
range of skills and backgrounds of the Directors 
prevent any undue individual or collective 
influence over the Board’s decision-making.

Board diversity
The Company remains committed to 
diversity on the Board in accordance with 
recommendations from the Davies Review 
(published in 2011), the Parker Review of 
November 2016 and the Code, and recognises 
the benefits that a diverse Board can achieve. 
The Board considers and reviews diversity 
in the fullest sense when considering 
appointments and succession planning and 
seeks to ensure a range of skills, experience and 
backgrounds are represented.

The Committee will continue to consider 
all diversity matters when reviewing future 
Board and senior management appointments, 
Board composition and the outcome of the 
annual evaluations.

Succession planning
A key area of focus of the Committee is the 
oversight of adequate succession planning  
in respect of both the Board and of the EMT.

When considering Board succession planning 
the Committee has considered the following 
areas at length:

•  the Committee structure and membership;
•  Non-executive Director engagement 

with management;

•  evaluation of the current skills and experience 

of the Board and gap analysis;

•  the tenure of Board members and phased 
review and consideration of roles for all 
Board members, for planned succession and 
timelines; and

•  the diversity of the Board and 

future requirements.

For EMT succession planning the Company 
is committed to the identification and 
development of suitable candidates. 
The Committee reviews the Company’s 
succession plans including periodic 
phased senior management refreshment 
programmes, designed to improve bench 
strength in capability and talent to achieve 
the Group’s strategic plan for growth and 
the talent pipeline for EMT and senior 
management succession.

Induction of Directors
On joining the Board, all Directors receive an 
induction tailored to their individual needs. 
The programme includes meetings with all 
Directors, the EMT, the Company Secretary 
and heads of functions. Key site visits are also 
scheduled and undertaken to meet business 
management and deepen commercial 
awareness of the Group.

On acceptance of their appointment, Directors 
are provided with a comprehensive suite of 
Group materials, which comprises: Group 
strategic plan, financial information and 
trading updates, risk registers, governance 
and regulatory guidance and documents, 
Group policies, Group and business structure, 
statutory documents of the Company, and 
Board and Committee papers, minutes and 
other reference documents for the prior 
12 month period.

Continuing professional 
development
As part of the Board evaluation process, the 
training and development needs of individual 
Directors are reviewed by the Chairman. 
The Company makes the necessary resources 
available to support Director development.

Stewart Oades 
Interim Chairman of Nomination Committee  
16 May 2018

39

Strategic reportGovernanceDirectors’ remuneration reportDirectors’ reportIndependent auditor’s reportAccountsWincanton plc Annual Report and Accounts 2018AUDIT COMMITTEE REPORT

Supporting the Board 
in matters relating to 
financial reporting, 
internal control and risk 
management.

Following the UK referendum vote for Brexit, 
the market, economic and regulatory impact 
has been kept under review by the Committee 
and particularly when considering the financial 
results and outlook for our future business, 
employees and costs, and potential impact on 
customers, suppliers and our pension fund. 
We will continue to monitor the developments 
on Brexit closely in the coming year.

The Committee welcomes constructive 
engagement on any of the areas under our 
remit and the Chairman can be contacted via 
the Company Secretary.

Paul Dean
Audit Committee Chairman  
16 May 2018

AUDIT COMMITTEE CHAIRMAN’S 
ANNUAL STATEMENT
I am pleased to present the Audit Committee’s 
report for the year ended 31 March 2018.

The Committee has continued to play a key 
role to support the Board in matters relating 
to financial reporting, internal control and risk 
management. We have had another busy year 
undertaking our principal responsibilities which 
are set out in this report. Some of this year’s 
highlights include the following: 

•  overseeing the continued adherence to the 
Company’s risk management and internal 
controls framework (including financial 
controls) to further align and embed the risk 
management culture across the Company; 
•  in-depth review of the Company’s IT general 
controls and information security risks and 
the ongoing implementation of controls on 
data, specifically with regard to the General 
Data Protection Regulation (GDPR); 

•  review and consideration of tax regulations, 
disclosures and new reporting requirements; 
and

•  assessment of the going concern and 

viability statements and the underlying 
models and assumptions, prior to 
consideration by the Board. 

AUDIT COMMITTEE’S REPORT
Membership
As at 31 March 2018, the membership of the 
Audit Committee is comprised of the five 
independent Non-executive Directors. I am 
pleased to welcome Gill Barr as a member of 
the Committee this year, her biography is set 
out on page 33.

Each member of the Audit Committee is 
independent and the membership meets the 
requirements of the Code. The Board is satisfied 
that the Chairman, Paul Dean, has recent and 
relevant financial experience in accordance 
with the Code.

Attendance at the Committee’s meetings 
are set out on page 37 in the Corporate 
Governance report.

Meetings
The Group’s Chief Financial Officer, Group 
Financial Controller, Head of Internal Audit and 
the External Auditor attend and report to each 
Audit Committee meeting. The Company 
Chairman and the Chief Executive Officer also 
regularly attend Audit Committee meetings 
by invitation.

During the year, the Audit Committee met 
privately with the External Auditor and 
separately with the Head of Internal Audit.

Role and responsibilities
The Audit Committee assists the Board on 
the effective review of financial performance, 
internal controls, financial reporting and 
risk management.

40

GovernanceWincanton plc Annual Report and Accounts 2018The Audit Committee’s remit, which is 
set out in its terms of reference, includes 
responsibilities for:

•  the content and integrity of financial 

statements and any formal announcements 
relating to financial performance, including 
review of the significant financial reporting 
judgements contained therein;

•  review of the Company’s internal controls  

and risk management systems;

•  review of the effectiveness of the Internal 

Audit function;

•  recommendations to the Board in relation 
to the appointment, reappointment and 
removal of the External Auditor, their 
remuneration and terms of engagement;

•  review and monitoring of the External 

Auditor’s independence and objectivity and 
the effectiveness of the audit process;

•  review of Group policies, including setting the 
policy to control engagement of the External 
Auditor to supply non-audit services;

•  reporting to the Board on any matters where 
it considers action or improvement is needed, 
including recommendation of remedial 
actions; and

•  reporting to the Board on how 
the Committee has discharged 
its responsibilities.

The Audit Committee has unrestricted access 
to Company documents, management, 
Internal Audit, the Company Secretary, the 
External Auditor and any other advisers, as and 
when required.

Activities in the year ended  
31 March 2018
The Audit Committee met three times during 
the year at scheduled meetings. Following the 
year end the Committee has held one further 
scheduled meeting. During those meetings 
the Committee covered the following activities:

Financial statements
•  review of the financial statements and 
narrative financial reporting in the 2017 
Annual Report and Accounts and financial 
statements in respect of the half year results 
to 30 September 2017 with particular 
reference to the reports being fair, balanced 
and understandable;

•  consideration of reports from the External 

Auditor in respect of financial reporting in the 
2017 Annual Report and Accounts and the 
half year results to 30 September 2017;

•  review of the key judgements and 

accounting matters, which includes going 
concern, in respect of the half year and full 
year to 31 March 2018; 

•  review of the preliminary results and 

half year results in the stock exchange 
announcements; and

•  review of updates from management on 

the progress of the projects for the adoption 
of IFRS 15 ‘Revenue from contracts with 
customers’ and IFRS 16 ‘Leases’ together with 
proposed disclosures in the Annual Report 
and Accounts for the year ended 31 March 
2017 and 2018 and the half year results to 
30 September 2017.

Control environment and risk management
•  review of Group policies, such as 
Whistleblowing, Bribery, Gifts and 
Entertainment, Sharedealing, Non-audit 
Services policies;

•  review of the whistleblowing procedure that 
employees may, in confidence, raise concerns 
about possible improprieties in matters of 
financial reporting or other matters;

•  review of the Risk Management Committee’s 

activities, including progress on risk 
management and refreshment of Group  
and business sector risk registers;
•  review of the viability assessment 

methodology, assessment outcomes and 
the statement of compliance, including 
determination of the assessment period  
and the robustness of the scenarios tested;

•  review of compliance reports from 

management and Internal Audit reports  
on completed control risk self-assessments;
•  review and agreement of the Group Internal 

Audit Plan for the coming financial year;
•  review and challenge of the Group’s 2018 
Internal Audit programme, including the 
results of key audits, significant findings,  
and management’s response and resolution;

•  meetings with the Head of Internal Audit 

without management; and

•  review the effectiveness of the Internal 

Audit function.

External Audit/Auditor
•  meetings with the External Auditor without 
management to consider any potential areas 
of concern;

•  review and consideration of the External 
Auditor’s findings and recommendations  
and management’s response from the audit 
of the year ended 31 March 2017;

•  approve the terms of appointment, areas  

of responsibility and duties;

•  scope and strategy of the 2018 external 

audit set out in the engagement letter and 
recommend approval to the Board; and

•  review of the External Auditor’s performance, 

independence and objectivity.

The Committee reviewed its own terms 
of reference which are considered to be 
satisfactory. The Committee and Board were 
satisfied that the Committee and its members 
continue to operate effectively individually and 
collectively and had discharged all of the duties 
within its remit. 

Financial reporting and significant 
financial matters
The principal matters of judgement considered 
by the Committee in relation to the accounts 
for the year ended 31 March 2018 and how 
they were addressed:

Pension scheme obligations
The balance sheet for the year ended 31 March 
2018 includes a pension scheme deficit of 
£49.5m, with gross pension obligations of 
£1,125.4m. 

In arriving at the gross obligation figure, the 
Committee considered the accounting basis 
of the pension scheme in the year ended 
31 March 2018 and reviewed the pension 
items provided by management, based 
on the Scheme Actuary’s report on the 
key assumptions in the pension obligation 
calculation and related income statement 
items. The Committee also considered the 
work performed by the External Auditor  
to test those assumptions.

The Committee was satisfied that the 
assumptions used and the disclosures in the 
Annual Report were appropriate.

Provisions
The balance sheet for the year ended 31 March 
2018 includes provisions of £50.9m. 

The Committee reviewed management 
reports on the provisions, including the 
property provision, insurance provision 
and other provisions. The reports cover the 
provisions made in the year, provisions released 
in the year, utilisation and the rationale for 
the year end provision. The Committee also 
considered the External Auditor’s testing of 
the assumptions and methodology used in 
determining the level of provisioning.

 The Committee was satisfied the assumptions 
and disclosures in the Annual Report 
were appropriate.

Materiality and misstatements
The External Auditor, following discussion 
with the Committee, set the materiality 
and notify the Committee if they identify 
any misstatements through their audit. 
The Committee reviews the External Auditor’s 
approach on materiality and level of materiality 
applied and any misstatements reported.

After review of management presentations 
and reports, including consultation with the 
External Auditor, the Committee was satisfied 
that the financial statements appropriately 
addressed the critical judgements and key 
estimates in respect of the amounts reported 
and the disclosures. The Committee was also 
satisfied that the significant assumptions 
used for determining the value of assets and 
liabilities had been appropriately scrutinised 
and challenged and on that basis the 
Committee recommended the Annual Report 
to the Board for approval.

41

Strategic reportGovernanceDirectors’ remuneration reportDirectors’ reportIndependent auditor’s reportAccountsWincanton plc Annual Report and Accounts 2018Auditor tender 
A robust and thorough audit tender was 
undertaken in 2016 which concluded with  
a recommendation to reappoint KPMG as 
the Group’s External Auditor. The Committee 
is acutely aware that, despite undertaking 
the tender in 2016, KPMG has been the 
Group’s External Auditor since it listed in 2001. 
Therefore, although there is no requirement 
to retender for some time, the performance 
and effectiveness of the Auditor are rigorously 
considered and their length of service and 
continued appointment is kept closely 
under review.

Non-audit services
The Company’s Non-audit Services Policy is 
intended to put in place appropriate controls 
for the approval and engagement of any non-
audit assignments according to the nature and 
value of the work, to safeguard audit objectivity 
and independence.

The FRC Ethical Standard sets out the 
permissible non-audit services that external 
auditors can perform, and KPMG ensures that 
all requests from the Company to provide 
non-audit services, to any KPMG office, are 
considered in the context of the Company’s 
policy and KPMG’s own ethical standards.

Full disclosure of audit and non-audit fees paid 
in the year ended 31 March 2018 are set out in 
Note 3 to the financial statements on page 79.

Paul Dean
Audit Committee Chairman 
16 May 2018

AUDIT COMMITTEE REPORT CONTINUED

Risk management 
The Group’s principal risk management 
systems comprise:

•  risk registers and reviews at both Group, 
business unit and support functions level;

•  periodic control risk self-assessments;
•  deep dives on specific risk profiles and 

challenges in particular business areas; and

•  Risk Management Committee (RMC) 

oversight.

A full report of the Group’s risk management 
systems and controls, principal risks and 
uncertainties; and statement following the 
viability assessment are included in the Risk 
report on pages 28 to 31.

Internal Audit function
The Head of Internal Audit reports to the Chief 
Financial Officer and has direct access to the 
Chief Executive Officer and Chairman of the 
Audit Committee. In addition to attendance  
at all Audit Committee meetings the Head  
of Internal Audit reports regularly on internal 
audit reviews to the EMT and RMC.

The Internal Audit function provides 
independent and objective review of risks 
and controls and reports to the Board, Audit 
Committee and senior management, to 
ensure the Group complies with corporate 
governance and regulatory responsibilities. 
The audit reports produced consider the 
extent to which systems of internal control 
and risk management are designed, operate 
effectively, manage or mitigate key risks, and 
safeguard assets or limit liabilities.

The role of Internal Audit and the scope of 
its work, are regularly reviewed to ensure it 
remains independent, fit for purpose and 
addresses business changes and regulatory 
requirements. The formal Audit Charter is 
reviewed by the Committee annually.

During the year, the annual evaluation of the 
Internal Audit function was considered by the 
Audit Committee. The results of the assessment 
concluded that the Internal Audit function was 
adequately resourced and operates effectively.

External Auditor
The Committee evaluates the effectiveness 
and independence of the external audit 
process and the External Auditor, KPMG, 
annually in respect of their performance and 
conduct. Simon Haydn-Jones remains the 
Senior Statutory Auditor since 1 April 2016.

Auditor performance
The Committee undertakes an annual 
comprehensive assessment of the External 
Auditor’s performance following the financial 
year end annual audit, scoring the performance 
and effectiveness of the External Auditor, 
taking on board feedback from management. 
The Committee was satisfied the External 
Auditor had performed effectively in respect  
of the external audits for the year ended 
31 March 2017 and the review of the half year  
to 30 September 2017.

The Committee also considered the findings 
contained in a report issued following an 
inspection of KPMG’s audit for the year ended 
31 March 2017 by the Financial Reporting 
Council’s Audit Quality Review Team. 
The Committee discussed the findings of this 
external report and the actions undertaken 
by KPMG to address the matters raised as part 
of the 2017 audit. It agreed that the audit was 
effective overall and that any identified areas 
for further improvement had been addressed 
or had appropriate action plans in place.

Auditor independence
The Committee requires the External Auditor 
to give an annual confirmation of the 
actions it has taken to ensure objectivity and 
independence, including where non-audit 
services are provided.

For the audit of these financial statements the 
External Auditor has confirmed compliance 
with the firm’s ethics and independence 
policies, partner and staff compliance with their 
ethics and independence manual, including 
prohibition on holding Company shares. 
KPMG has assured the Group their ethics and 
independence manual is fully consistent with 
the professional practice rules of the Financial 
Reporting Council (FRC), the auditor’s regulator.

In addition, KPMG has put in place further 
independence safeguards through professional 
values, communications, internal accountability, 
risk management and independent reviews. 
KPMG regularly reviews the composition of the 
audit team and rotates teams in accordance 
with the relevant regulations; and considers 
the fees paid by the Company and its related 
entities for professional services provided.

Any significant new engagement undertaken 
for the Company is subject to acceptance 
procedures, requiring consultation with Simon 
Haydn-Jones, the Senior Statutory Auditor.

42

GovernanceWincanton plc Annual Report and Accounts 2018REMUNERATION COMMITTEE CHAIRMAN’S ANNUAL STATEMENT

We continue to believe that 
the Remuneration Policy 
supports delivery of the 
Group’s strategic targets.

REMUNERATION COMMITTEE 
CHAIRMAN’S ANNUAL STATEMENT
I am pleased to present the Directors’ 
Remuneration report for the year ended 
31 March 2018. 

Following approval by shareholders at the 
2017 AGM, the Group’s current Remuneration 
Policy became effective from 1 July 2017 
and is expected to remain in effect until the 
2020 AGM. The key aspects of the policy are 
summarised on pages 52 to 58. We continue 
to believe that the Policy supports delivery 
of the Group’s strategic targets, motivates 
individuals to deliver high performance and 
enables us to recruit and retain the most 
appropriate Directors and senior management 
for Wincanton. 

During the year the Committee undertook 
a range of duties delegated to it by the 
Board and applied the Policy to executive 
remuneration. These activities included 
approval of salary increases, LTIP awards 
and bonus payments to Executive 
Directors and senior management. As we 
do each year, the Committee sought to 
ensure that remuneration design rewards 
high performance consistent with the 
Remuneration Policy. In line with the previous 
year, the Committee did not recommend 
a change to the Chairman’s fee and the 
Non-executive Directors’ fees also remained 
unchanged. An increase in salary was awarded 
to the Executive Directors effective 1 July 2017 
that was broadly consistent with the average 
employee salary increase across the Group. 
The Committee has applied the same principle 
again for salaries of Executive Directors 
effective 1 July 2018. 2017 LTIP awards, granted 
in the form of nil cost options, were made to 
Executive Directors contingent on the same 
performance conditions applied in 2016, and 
the Committee considers the performance  

metrics continue to reinforce stretching 
business performance. The LTIP awards were 
also granted at the same level as in previous 
years. The Committee thoroughly reviewed 
the Executive Directors’ performance and 
bonus objectives which contained targets 
for financial performance and growth, and 
non-financial activities linked to the Group’s 
strategic objectives set out on page 46. 
The Committee agreed that the profit measure 
for the Senior Management Annual Bonus Plan 
and General Management Bonus Plan for the 
financial year ended 31 March 2018 would be 
changed to underlying profit before tax (PBT), 
from underlying operating profit, to further 
incentivise appropriate management of debt 
by additionally capturing our financing costs.

Following a solid financial performance 
consistent with our strategy of cost control 
and top line growth in key sectors and  
achievement across all of their non-financial 
objectives and targets, the Committee 
considered the award of £369,004 (being 
55.9% of his annual bonus entitlement) for 
Adrian Colman and £219,269 (being 59.9% of 
his annual bonus entitlement) for Tim Lawlor 
to be a fair and reasonable award for the year 
ended 31 March 2018. The bonus awards and 
payments were also determined in line with 
the Directors’ Remuneration Policy and will 
continue to operate in this way for the year 
ended 31 March 2019. Further details regarding 
specific variable elements of pay received 
by the Executive Directors, to recognise their 
continued strong performance delivered for 
shareholders in pursuit of sustained growth, 
can be found in the Directors’ Remuneration 
report on pages 45 to 47. All aspects of variable 
and non variable pay are in line with the 
approved Remuneration Policy.

The Committee considers executive pay in light 
of the remuneration approach for the broader 
employee population, and further details can 

be found on page 49. The Committee also 
continues to monitor all senior management 
changes, below the Executive Directors, and 
reviews amendments to pay and conditions, 
as well as approves any bonus payments. 
Pay increases were awarded with an average 
rise across the Group of 1.0%.

There were two Non-executive Director 
changes during the year. It was with deep 
regret that the Committee learned of the 
sudden death of Steve Marshall, a member of 
the Committee, who served as Chairman for six 
years since his appointment in 2011. A search 
has been commissioned and is progressing 
appropriately. In the meantime the Board 
appointed Stewart Oades as Interim Chairman. 
After consideration by the Committee it was 
agreed that Stewart’s fees for the interim period 
should reflect those of the prior Chairman’s to 
take into account the additional requirements 
and responsibilities of the role. 

I am delighted that Gill Barr joined the Committee 
in September 2017 as a Non-executive Director. 
Her full biography is available on page 33. 
Gill was appointed on terms consistent with 
the remaining Non-executive Directors.

Finally, following my statement, you will 
find the Annual Report on Remuneration. 
This report will be presented to our 
shareholders for an advisory vote at the 
forthcoming AGM, and expands on the areas 
I have summarised above. As a Committee 
we welcome engagement and constructive 
dialogue and if you would like to contact us 
please do so through the Company Secretary.

Martin Sawkins
Remuneration Committee Chairman 
16 May 2018

43

Strategic reportGovernanceDirectors’ remuneration reportDirectors’ reportIndependent auditor’s reportAccountsDirectors’ remuneration reportWincanton plc Annual Report and Accounts 2018ANNUAL REPORT ON REMUNERATION

The Chief Executive Officer, Chief Financial 
Officer and Group HR Director attend the 
Committee’s meetings by invitation to provide 
advice and assistance on specific matters. 
However, no attendee was present when their 
own remuneration was being discussed.

•  review and approve incentive outcomes for 
Executive Directors and senior management 
for the prior year, i.e. annual bonus for the 
year ended 31 March 2017 and vesting of 
Special Option Plan (SOP) awards granted 
in July 2014;

•  consider grants of LTIP awards, including 
performance conditions, to Executive 
Directors and other senior management in 
the Group identified with key skills and/or 
roles to significantly drive Group value and 
performance improvement;

•  review and approve the Annual Report 
on Remuneration for the year ended 
31 March 2017;

•  review the Chairman’s fee;
•  measure and monitor performance for the 
unvested SOP and LTIP awards on a regular 
basis; and

•  approve exercises of vested share awards 
and any adjustments or lapses for leavers.

Remuneration consultant
Mercer Kepler (part of MMC Group LP) is 
the Committee’s appointed Remuneration 
Consultant regarding remuneration 
advice. Mercer Kepler is a founding 
member of and signatory to the Code of 
Conduct for Remuneration Consultants. 
For more detail please refer to the website, 
www.remunerationconsultantsgroup.com.

The Committee annually reviews the support 
and advice provided by Mercer Kepler and 
is comfortable that Mercer Kepler continues 
to provide objective and independent 
remuneration advice and has no conflicts 
of interest with the Group that may impair 
its independence. Other than advice on 
remuneration, the MMC Group of companies 
also provides unrelated advice in relation to 
investment strategy.

During the year, Mercer Kepler attended 
Committee meetings upon invitation 
to provide advice and support to the 
Committee in areas such as: implementing 
the remuneration policy; current market 
practice; governance developments; drafting 
the remuneration report; and performance 
updates for the Long Term Incentive Plan.

Fees payable to Mercer Kepler amounted to 
£24,455 (2017: £48,765), based on attendance 
at meetings and advisory materials. Fees for 
the year ended 31 March 2018 include Mercer 
Kepler’s support on reviewing remuneration 
policy and on implementation of the LTIP.

Committee Terms of Reference
The Terms of Reference of the Committee 
are reviewed annually to ensure they 
reflect current regulatory and governance 
requirements and duties. The Committee’s 
Terms of Reference are available on the Group’s 
website at www.wincanton.co.uk/investors/
governance/board-committees.

The main responsibilities of the Committee 
are to:

•  set and determine the Directors’ 

Remuneration Policy and consider 
remuneration policy across the Group;

•  set and determine the Executive Directors’ 
remuneration arrangements and fees for 
the Chairman;

•  approve the design of performance-related 

remuneration for Executive Directors;

•  monitor the level and structure of 

remuneration for senior management;
•  approve the design of, and determine 

targets for, relevant performance-related pay 
schemes operated by the Group;

•  determine whether and the extent to which 
performance targets have been met for the 
Senior Management Annual Bonus Plan and 
for the Group’s long term incentives;

•  oversee any major changes in employee 

benefit structures at Group level;

•  select and appoint consultants to provide 

independent advice to the Committee; and

•  ensure reporting is in line with applicable 

legislation and regulation.

Activities during the year ended 
31 March 2018
The Company’s approach to remuneration 
arrangements for Directors is in line with the 
prior year and remains compliant with the 
Directors’ Remuneration Policy in force.

The principal activities of the Committee 
during the year were to:

•  review Executive Directors’ remuneration 
and determine remuneration packages 
for the Chief Executive Officer and Chief 
Financial Officer;

•  consider the Chairman’s and Chief Executive 
Officer’s recommendations for remuneration 
for Executive Directors and the EMT, 
respectively;

•  consider the HR strategy for the Group and 
compliance with the Remuneration Policy;

INTRODUCTION
The Annual Report on Remuneration sets 
out the Company’s remuneration of its 
Directors during the year ended 31 March 
2018 in line with the Directors’ Remuneration 
Policy approved by shareholders at the 
Company’s 2017 AGM, and how it intends 
the Remuneration Policy to apply for the year 
ended 31 March 2019.

This report is subject to an advisory vote 
by shareholders at the Company’s AGM on 
28 June 2018.

COMPLIANCE STATEMENT
The Directors’ Remuneration Report, as a 
whole, has been prepared on behalf of the 
Board by the Remuneration Committee in 
accordance with the Code, the Listing Rules 
and the Large and Medium-sized Companies 
and Groups (Accounts and Reports) 
(Amendment) Regulations 2013.

The Directors’ Remuneration Report comprises 
the Committee Chairman’s Annual Statement, 
this report and the Directors’ Remuneration 
Policy together with the accompanying notes. 
The Chairman’s Annual Statement and the 
Remuneration Policy are not subject to audit. 
Sections of this report are subject to audit and 
are highlighted accordingly.

ROLE OF THE REMUNERATION 
COMMITTEE
The main role of the Committee is to 
ensure that the remuneration of Directors 
and senior management supports the 
delivery of the strategic goals of the Group 
without encouraging undesirable risk taking 
behaviour. This objective is achieved by: 
setting remuneration appropriate to the 
industry and markets in which the Group 
operates; and making a significant proportion 
of remuneration dependent on delivery of 
demanding but achievable performance 
targets key to delivering the business 
strategy, to reinforce development of a high 
performance culture.

Meetings
Details of Committee membership and 
attendance at meetings are included in 
the Corporate Governance report on page 
37. There were five scheduled Committee 
meetings during the year and one additional 
meeting between 1 April 2018 and the date  
of this report.

Members of the Committee were all 
independent Non-executive Directors selected 
to represent a broad range of backgrounds and 
experience to provide balance and diversity. 

44

Directors’ remuneration reportWincanton plc Annual Report and Accounts 2018STATEMENT OF SHAREHOLDER VOTING
The Committee recognises the importance of engaging with stakeholders in relation to the design of executive remuneration, the creation of a Directors’ 
Remuneration Policy, compliance with remuneration regulations that came into force in 2014 and continued best practice development.

During the year, at the Company’s AGM on 29 June 2017, the advisory resolution for approval of the Annual Report on Remuneration received the 
following votes:

Votes for
84,214,956

%
99.75

Votes against
210,748

%
0.25

Total votes
84,425,704

% of ISC voted1
67.79

Votes withheld
138,240

1  The Issued Share Capital (ISC) of the Company as at the date of the Company’s 2017 AGM was 124,543,670 Ordinary Shares of 10p each.

At the Company’s 2017 AGM, the binding resolution for approval of the Remuneration Policy received the following votes:

Votes for
84,198,079

%
99.67

Votes against
274,712

%
0.33

Total votes
84,472,791

% of ISC voted1
67.83

Votes withheld
56,154

1  The Issued Share Capital (ISC) of the Company as at the date of the Company’s 2017 AGM was 124,543,670 Ordinary Shares of 10p each.

SINGLE TOTAL FIGURE OF REMUNERATION – EXECUTIVE DIRECTORS (AUDITED)

Fixed pay
Salary and fees
Taxable benefits1
Pension related benefits2 
Sub total
Bonus3
Long term incentives4
Sub total
Total

Adrian Colman

Tim Lawlor

31 March 2018 
£’000

31 March 2017 
£’000

31 March 2018 
£’000

31 March 2017 
£’000

439
26
97
562
369
903
1,272
1,834

435
26
96
557
478
973
1,451
2,008

304
17
46
367
219
298
517
884

299
16
45
360
277
–
277
637

1  The taxable benefits comprise the gross value of those benefits provided to the Executive Directors, including company car allowance and healthcare. The value of company car allowance 

provided during the year ending 31 March 2018 was £25,000 for Adrian Colman and £15,600 for Tim Lawlor.

2  The pension related benefits comprise the amounts contributed to the defined contribution section of the Company’s pension scheme or the salary supplement provided in lieu of such 

contributions where the value exceeds the annual allowance set by HMRC.

3  Annual Bonus award payments made to the Executive Directors for the years ended 31 March 2017 and 2018 were paid 100% in cash. Further information is detailed on page 46.
4  The value of long term incentives for the year ended 31 March 2018 includes awards vesting for performance during the financial year under the legacy 2014 SOP and 2015 LTIP. The 2014 SOP 
is valued based on the embedded gain between the option price and the share price on date of vest; the embedded gain was £0.95 per share (based on the share price at date of vesting 
on 11 July 2017 of £2.32). The 2015 LTIP is valued based on the three-month average share price to year-end of £2.23, as the share price on date of vesting (16 July 2018) is not yet known. 
Further details can be found on pages 46 and 47.

IMPLEMENTATION OF REMUNERATION POLICY FOR THE YEAR ENDED 31 MARCH 2018
Salaries
Executive Directors’ salaries are reviewed annually with any change effective from 1 July.

During the year, the Committee awarded a 0.8% increase to Adrian Colman and 1.7% increase to Tim Lawlor effective from 1 July 2017, aligned with 
the average budgeted salary increase across the Group. The salaries of the Executive Directors as at 31 March 2018 and with effect from 1 July 2018  
are set out in the following table and the increases are in line with that for the wider employee population:

Adrian Colman
Tim Lawlor

Salary as at  
1 July 2018 
£
446,600
311,100

Salary as at  
31 March 2018 
£
440,000
305,000

Change
1.5%
2.0%

Salary as at  
31 March 2017 
£
436,450
300,000

Change
0.8%
1.7%

Total pension scheme entitlements (audited)
Adrian Colman and Tim Lawlor are members of a defined contribution section of the Wincanton plc Pension Scheme. During the year the Company 
paid an employers’ pension contribution equivalent to 22% of Adrian Colman’s pensionable salary and 15% of Tim Lawlor’s pensionable salary. 
Where the individual’s pension exceeded the HMRC annual allowance in the 2017/18 tax year, the excess was paid in the form of a taxable cash 
payment. Executive Director pension arrangements for the year ended 31 March 2019 will be consistent with the approach for 2017/18.

45

Strategic reportGovernanceDirectors’ remuneration reportDirectors’ reportIndependent auditor’s reportAccountsWincanton plc Annual Report and Accounts 2018ANNUAL REPORT ON REMUNERATION CONTINUED

The Senior Management Annual Bonus Plan for the year ending 31 March 2018 (audited)
For the year ended 31 March 2018, both Executive Directors were eligible to participate in the Senior Management Annual Bonus Plan (ABP). 
The maximum opportunities for the year were 150%  of salary and 120% of salary for Adrian Colman and Tim Lawlor, respectively. The ABP is normally 
paid in cash; however, if the share ownership guideline is yet to be achieved, any bonus earned above 100% of salary must be used by the Executive 
Director to purchase Wincanton shares until the share ownership guideline is achieved.

The performance conditions for the year ended 31 March 2018 were 60% weighted on Group financial performance as measured through underlying 
profit before tax (PBT), and 40% weighted on performance against personal objectives. Of the personal objectives element, half was weighted on 
financial and half weighted on non-financial objectives.

ABP: underlying profit before tax element

Underlying PBT performance
Bonus opportunity on the underlying PBT element

Threshold
£44.2m
25%

Target
£46.5m
50%

Maximum
£48.8m
100%

Actual
£46.4m
47.9%

ABP: personal objectives element
The personal financial objectives for Adrian Colman and Tim Lawlor for the year ended 31 March 2018 included: making material progress in the 
triennial pension negotiations balancing the needs of all stakeholders; delivering market expectations for the Group across all key metrics; and 
delivering revenue growth in excess of prior year growth. The personal non-financial objectives for Adrian Colman and Tim Lawlor for the year ended 
31 March 2018 included: building and enhancing the sales and senior management teams; making further progress on the implementation of the 
Group’s strategy; continued strong engagement with the Group’s top 20 customers; building the Wincanton brand; improving operational delivery; 
and, achieving focus on labour cost challenges.

The Committee considered the performance of both Executive Directors, and reviewed the performance against each of their respective objectives. 
Pension discussions are progressing in a challenging and complex macro environment; the Group has met or beaten all market expectations across all 
key financial metrics despite a number of challenges faced, particularly in the Industrial & Transport sector during the year which required early senior 
management intervention; although revenue growth was achieved this was below the target levels of growth the objectives required despite real 
progress in building the business capability in this area. The business has achieved good progress in building the bench strength of both the sales and 
wider senior management teams in the year: the Board has been kept fully informed on progress with regard to the business strategy implementation 
and progress continues to be made; excellent progress has been made to innovate and position the business for the emerging impact of the  digital 
economy. Following due consideration of the evidence to support achievements of each of the objectives, together with their overall annual 
performance review, the Committee concluded that both of the Executive Directors have performed well in their financial and non-financial bonus 
objectives which had directly resulted in a strong Group performance and with the Group well positioned for growth and to support stakeholders’ 
future needs.

The table below sets out the awards of bonuses for the achievement of personal objectives for the year ended 31 March 2018 determined by 
the Committee:

Bonus level percentage of personal objective element (% of maximum)

Adrian Colman
68.0%

Tim Lawlor
78.0%

Following consideration of the above, the Committee awarded an annual bonus equivalent to £369,004 (being 83.9% of salary) to Adrian Colman and 
£219,269 (being 71.9% of salary) to Tim Lawlor, based on their salary at the end of the year ended 31 March 2018.

Long term incentives – vesting of 2014 Special Option Plan awards (audited)

The Special Option Plan (SOP) is a legacy long term incentive plan which expired on 31 March 2015. SOP awards were made as market priced options, 
which meant that the Executive Directors would only realise value to the extent that the options vested, following satisfaction of the performance 
conditions and if the share price had increased above the option price. The final awards made to Executive Directors under the SOP were granted  
in July 2014 and vested in July 2017.

For SOP awards made in July 2014, threshold vesting (25% of maximum) required average TSR to exceed 10% per annum over the three-year period  
to July 2017, and full vesting required average TSR of 22% per annum. There was also an EPS underpin which required no reduction to the underlying 
EPS at any point during the relevant three year period. If EPS reduced at any point during the relevant three year period, the relevant awards would 
lapse in full regardless of TSR performance.

In terms of actual performance, average TSR to July 2017 was 25% per annum, and there was no reduction in EPS over the period. This resulted  
in a vesting outcome of 100% of maximum. The performance outcomes above have resulted in the following SOP vesting levels:

Adrian Colman

Date of award
11 July 2014

Vest date
11 July 2017

Option exercise
 price1
£1.37

No. of SOP awards 
granted
446,715

No. of SOP 
awards vesting for 
performance
446,7152

1  The option price is calculated using the three day average share price immediately preceding the date of award.
2  The value of this award for the purpose of the single figure is based on embedded gain, calculated as the difference between option price of 137p per share and the share price at date of vest. 

46

Directors’ remuneration reportWincanton plc Annual Report and Accounts 2018 
Long term incentives – 2015 Long Term Incentive Plan awards (audited)
The Company reviewed its long term incentive arrangements in 2014, and a new Long Term Incentive Plan (LTIP) was approved by shareholders  
at the 2014 AGM. In July and September 2015, awards of 100% of salary were made under the LTIP to Adrian Colman and Tim Lawlor, respectively.

Vesting of the awards was based 60% on basic underlying EPS growth, and 40% on TSR relative to the FTSE All-Share Index (excluding investment 
trusts). EPS growth is measured on a point-to-point basis over the three year period to the year ended 31 March 2018, with 25% of the element vesting 
for 6% growth per annum and 100% vesting for 11% growth per annum. The TSR element is also measured over the three year period to 31 March 
2018; 25% vests if the Company’s TSR is equal to the TSR of the Index itself and 100% vests if TSR is equal to Index + 10% per annum. There is straight-
line vesting between threshold and maximum for both the EPS and TSR elements.

In respect of the EPS element, growth over the period was 15% per annum, resulting in a vesting outcome of 100% for the element. In respect of the 
TSR element, TSR over the period was equal to Index + 7.9% per annum, resulting in a vesting outcome of 84.6% for the element. The Committee is 
satisfied the EPS growth and TSR performance outcomes reflect the underlying performance of the Company. The total amount that will vest in July 
2018 will therefore be 93.8% of the total award.

The performance outcomes above have resulted in the following LTIP vesting levels:

Adrian Colman
Tim Lawlor

Date of award
16 July 2015

Vest date
16 July 2018
28 September 20151 28 September 2018

No. of LTIP  
awards granted
228,845
142,512

No. of LTIP awards 
to vest for performance2
214,771
133,747

1  Tim Lawlor was appointed on 28 September 2015 and received an award under the LTIP on his appointment.
2  Awards will vest in July and September 2018, subject to the individuals’ continued employment on the respective vesting dates.

LTIP awards made in the year ended 31 March 2018 (audited)
LTIP awards made to the Executive Directors during the year are set out below, based on 100% of salary for both Adrian Colman and Tim Lawlor. 
The EPS and TSR performance period for the 18 July 2017 awards is 1 April 2017 to 31 March 2020.

Vesting of the awards will be based 60% on basic underlying EPS and 40% on TSR relative to the FTSE All-Share Index (excluding investment trusts). 
Under the EPS element, 25% of the element vesting for 6% growth per annum and 100% vesting for 11% growth per annum. Under the TSR element, 
25% vests if the Company’s TSR is equal to the TSR of the Index itself and 100% vests if TSR is equal to Index + 10% per annum (calibrated to be 
equivalent to upper quartile TSR). There is straight-line vesting between threshold and maximum for both elements.

Adrian Colman
Tim Lawlor

1  Average share price over the three business days preceding the date of grant.

Date of award
18 July 2017
18 July 2017

Vest date
18 July 2020
18 July 2020

Share price1
£2.51
£2.51

No. of nil cost 
options granted 
under the LTIP
175,299
121,514

Face value  
of award (£)
440,000
305,000

IMPLEMENTATION OF REMUNERATION POLICY FOR THE YEAR ENDED 31 MARCH 2019
Salaries
The Committee determined to award a 1.5% increase to the Chief Executive Officer and a 2.0% increase to the Chief Financial Officer, effective from 
1 July 2018. This is in line with the salary increase awarded across the Group which averaged 1.5%.

ABP and LTIP
The Group intends to operate the ABP and the LTIP in the year ended 31 March 2019, including their respective performance conditions and 
opportunities, in line with the approach in the year ended 31 March 2018.

The ABP opportunities will remain 150% of salary and 120% of salary for Adrian Colman and Tim Lawlor, respectively, and will be based 60% on Group 
underlying profit before tax, and 40% on performance against personal objectives (of which half is weighted on financial and half weighted on non-
financial targets). As in previous years, any bonus earned above 100% of salary must be used to purchase Wincanton shares until the share ownership 
guideline is achieved. The Committee considers it commercially sensitive to disclose annual bonus targets prospectively and will provide disclosure  
of these in the Directors’ Remuneration Report for the year ended 31 March 2019.

The Committee expects the 2018 LTIP award to be based 60% on basic underlying EPS growth and 40% on TSR relative to the FTSE All-Share Index 
(excluding investment trusts), measured over three years. It is anticipated that the performance ranges will also be consistent with those applied in 
2017. For the EPS element, 25% will vest for 6% growth per annum with 100% vesting for 11% growth per annum and, for the TSR element, 25% will 
vest for Wincanton TSR equal to the Index TSR with 100% vesting for Wincanton TSR equal to Index + 10% per annum, and with straight-line vesting  
in between. LTIP opportunities are also expected to remain in line with the approach for 2017 LTIP awards, with opportunities of up to 100% of salary.

47

Strategic reportGovernanceDirectors’ remuneration reportDirectors’ reportIndependent auditor’s reportAccountsWincanton plc Annual Report and Accounts 2018ANNUAL REPORT ON REMUNERATION CONTINUED

Single total figure of remuneration – Non-executive Directors (audited)
The table below sets out the fees of the Non-executive Directors in the year. During the year, the role of Chairman received an annual fee of £170,000 
and the Non-executive Directors each received an annual base fee of £45,000. Additional fees of £8,000 were paid to Committee chairmen (excluding 
the Nomination Committee, which is chaired by the Chairman). The fees will remain unchanged in the year ending 31 March 2019.

Steve Marshall1
Paul Dean
Stewart Oades1
David Radcliffe
Martin Sawkins
Gill Barr2

At 31 March 2018

Committee  
Chair fee £’000
–
8
–
–
8
–

Fees £’000
85
45
108
45
45
24

Total £’000
85
53
108
45
53
24

At 31 March 2017

Committee  
Chair fee £’000
–
8
–
–
8
–

Fees £’000
170
45
45
45
45
–

Total £’000
170
53
45
45
53
–

1  Steve Marshall acted as Chairman until his death was announced by the Company on 29 September 2017. The Board appointed Stewart Oades as interim Chairman on 1 October 2017, and after 

consideration by the Committee it was agreed that Stewart’s fees for the interim period should reflect those of  the prior Chairman for the year ended 31 March 2018. 

2  Gill Barr was appointed on 15 September 2017 and therefore the fee paid in the year ended 31 March 2018 was prorated accordingly.  The fee was agreed by the Committee and is consistent 

with other Non-executive Directors. 

PERFORMANCE AND PAY
Set out below is a line graph that shows the TSR performance over a nine year period for both a holding of the Company’s shares and of the FTSE 
SmallCap Index. The latter was agreed by the Committee to be the most appropriate comparator as the Company is a constituent of the index. 
The chart further shows TSR for FTSE All-Share excluding investment trusts as this is the comparator group for measuring TSR performance under 
the LTIP.

Wincanton TSR vs. the FTSE SmallCap and the FTSE All-Share xIT over 9 years – Value of £100 invested on 31 March 2009 (£)
450

400

350

300

250

200

150

100

50

0

Mar
2009

Mar
2010

Mar
2011

Mar
2012

Mar
2013

Mar
2014

Mar
2015

Mar
2016

Wincanton

FTSE AllShare xIT

FTSE Small Cap

Mar
2017

Mar
2018

Source: MERCER KEPLER

48

Directors’ remuneration reportWincanton plc Annual Report and Accounts 2018The table below sets out the total remuneration and the amount vesting under ABP and Long Term Incentive Plans, as a percentage of the maximum 
that could have been achieved in each year of the same period as set out in the graph above, for the Chief Executive:

Year ended 31 March Chief Executive
2018
2017
2016
2016
2015
2014
2013
2012
2011
2011
2010

Adrian Colman
Adrian Colman
Adrian Colman3
Eric Born3
Eric Born
Eric Born
Eric Born
Eric Born
Eric Born11
Graeme McFaull11
Graeme McFaull

Chief Executive 
single figure of total 
remuneration £’000
1,834
2,008
1,653
3,750
2,051
1,264
893
710
249
397
655

Annual bonus payout 
against maximum 
opportunity
55.9%
73%
61%4
–4
56%7
68%9
69%9
41%9
0%
0%
64%13

Long term incentive 
vesting rates 
against maximum 
opportunity
97.9%1
100%2
100%5
100%6
100%8
100%8
100%8,10
100%10
n/a
0%12
9%14

1  Awards under the July 2014 SOP vested in full. Awards under the July 2015 LTIP will vest at 93.8% on 16 July 2018 as associated performance conditions have been partially met in the year  

to 31 March 2018.

2  Awards under the July 2013 SOP vested in full.
3  Adrian Colman was appointed 1 August 2015. Eric Born resigned on 31 July 2015. These figures contain pro rated remuneration in respect of each Director according to the period served.
4  The Committee deemed that Eric Born should not receive a bonus in respect of the year ended 31 March 2016. For the purposes of this table the percentage of Adrian Colman’s bonus is the 

pro-rated element attributable to the period he served as Chief Executive and not his full year bonus for the year ended 31 March 2016.

5  Awards under the January 2013 SOP award vested in full.
6  Awards under the 2012 SOP award vested in full.
7  The maximum opportunity for ‘single figure’ purposes is 200% of salary. The Committee decided the bonus would be paid 100% in cash as the plan ended on 31 March 2015 and no 

performance conditions would be applied, therefore it is not defined as a long term incentive.

8  Awards under the Company’s EBP vested in full.
9  The maximum opportunity for ‘single figure’ purposes is 200% of salary. 50% of bonus is deferred in shares which vest subject to performance and are therefore defined as a long term incentive.
10 Awards under the Company’s Deferred Annual Bonus Scheme vested in full.
11 Eric Born was appointed 14 December 2010. Graeme McFaull resigned on 14 December 2010. These figures contain pro rated remuneration in respect of each Director according to the 

period served.

12 Awards under the Company’s Share Match Incentive Scheme and the Performance Share Plan all lapsed due to performance conditions not being met.
13 The maximum opportunity for ‘single figure’ purposes is 25% of salary. 75% of bonus was deferred in shares which vested subject to performance and are therefore defined as a long 

term incentive.

14 Awards under the Company’s Share Match Incentive Scheme and the Executive Share Option Scheme vested in full however the awards under the Executive Share Option Scheme were 

‘underwater’ and are excluded from this table.

CHANGE IN THE REMUNERATION OF THE CHIEF EXECUTIVE OFFICER AND COMPARATOR EMPLOYEES
The table below sets out the percentage change in annual cash awarded to the Chief Executive between the year ended 31 March 2017 and the year 
ended 31 March 2018, compared to the change in annual cash awarded to a comparator group of employees, as set out below.

Salary
Taxable benefits
Annual variable

31 March 2018 
 £’000
439
26
369

Chief Executive

31 March 2017  
£’000
435
26
478

Increase/ 
(decrease)
1.0%
–
(22.8)%

Average change for the
 comparator group1
2.6%
–
(12.2)%

1  The comparator group is an average cost per person for all management level employees. 

The comparator group comprises all management level employees, approximately 300 people. This group was chosen as broadly the same group  
of employees that are entitled to participate in the Group’s management bonus scheme and a similar range of taxable benefits, and is consistent  
with the group used as comparators for this purpose in previous financial years. Furthermore, a significant proportion of the Group’s employees are  
on legacy employment arrangements as a result of having transferred into the business or are entitled to remuneration arrangements determined  
by customers rather than the Group.

Executive Directors’ external appointments
No Executive Directors held any external directorships during the year and do not hold any at the date of this report.

Payments to past Directors (audited)
There have been no payments made to past Directors during the year under review.

Payments for loss of office (audited)
There have been no payments for loss of office made during the year under review.

49

Strategic reportGovernanceDirectors’ remuneration reportDirectors’ reportIndependent auditor’s reportAccountsWincanton plc Annual Report and Accounts 2018ANNUAL REPORT ON REMUNERATION CONTINUED

Relative importance of spend on pay
The following table is intended to assist in understanding the relative importance of the remuneration in the context of the Group’s financial position 
more generally.

Item
Remuneration of all employees1 
Dividend or share buyback

31 March 2018 
£m
542.0
12.3

31 March 2017 
£m
525.8
11.2

Difference 
£m
16.2
1.1

1  This includes all personnel expenses, including Executive Directors, as set out in Note 4 to the consolidated financial statements.

The Directors are proposing a final dividend in respect of the financial year ended 31 March 2018 of 6.63p per share (31 March 2017: 6.1p).

SHARE OWNERSHIP
Total share interests at 31 March 2018 (audited) 

Director
Adrian Colman
Tim Lawlor
Martin Sawkins
David Radcliffe
Paul Dean
Stewart Oades
Gill Barr

Shares

Nil cost options

Options

Unvested 
and subject 
to continued 
employment
–
–
–
–
–
–
–

Owned/vested
946,942
–
9,790
25,000
10,000
19,367
–

Vested but 
unexercised
–
–
–
–
–
–
–

Unvested and 
subject to 
performance
650,726
433,518
–
–
–
–
–

Vested but 
unexercised
446,715
–
–
–
–
–
–

Unvested and 
subject to 
performance
–
–
–
–
–
–
–

Share ownership policy
Employee share ownership is a key part of the Directors’ Remuneration Policy and is designed to help maintain long term commitment through 
accountability, and provide the opportunity to benefit from growth in Group value as shareholders. Adrian Colman is required to build and maintain  
a shareholding level of 300% of salary, which he met during the year ended 31 March 2016 and continues to maintain at the date of this report.

Tim Lawlor joined the Company on 28 September 2015 and has not met the minimum shareholding guideline of 150% of salary that applies to new 
Executive Directors under the Directors’ Remuneration Policy during the year. In accordance with the Directors’ Remuneration Policy, Tim Lawlor  
is expected to purchase shares with any bonus above 100% of salary until the shareholding guideline is achieved.

Executive Directors’ share interests as at 31 March 2018 (audited)

Adrian Colman
Tim Lawlor

Partnership Shares held under the SIP

Unrestricted shares held

Total shares held

31 March 2018
–
–

31 March 2017
–
–

31 March 2018
946,942
–

31 March 2017
150,565
–

31 March 2018
946,942
–

31 March 2017
150,565
–

There were no changes in the Directors’ personal holdings between 1 April 2018 and the date of this report.

50

Directors’ remuneration reportWincanton plc Annual Report and Accounts 2018 
Share plan interests

Adrian Colman
SOP
SOP
SOP
LTIP
LTIP
LTIP

Tim Lawlor
LTIP
LTIP
LTIP

Date of award

Vest date

Option 
exercise
price1

Share 
price  
at date
of award2

No. of  
shares under  
award as at  
1 April 2017

Shares 
awarded 
during the 
year

No. of shares  
lapsed  
during  
the year

No. of shares 
exercised  
during  
the year

No. of  
shares under 
award at  
31 March 2018

29 January 2013
12 July 2013
11 July 2014
16 July 2015
21 July 2016
18 July 2017

29 January 2016
12 July 2016
11 July 2017
16 July 2018
21 July 2019
18 July 2020

£0.71
£0.68
£1.37
Nil
Nil
Nil

£0.708
£0.66
£1.40
£1.88
£1.77
£2.51

28 September 2015
21 July 2016
18 July 2017

28 September 2018
21 July 2019
18 July 2020

Nil
Nil
Nil

£2.07
£1.77
£2.51

1,059,322
886,262
446,715
228,845
246,582
–
2,867,726

142,512
169,492
–
312,004

–
–
–
–
–
175,299
175,299

–
–
121,514
121,514

–
–
–
–
–
–
–

–
–
–

(1,059,322)
(886,262)
–
–
–
–

–
–
446,715
228,845
246,582
175,299
(1,945,584) 1,097,441

–
–
–

142,512
169,492
121,514
433,518

1  The option price is calculated using the three day average share price immediately preceding the date of award where relevant.
2  The Mid Market Quotation (MMQ) share price on the date of award.

Non-executive Directors’ share interests as at 31 March 2018 (audited)

Steve Marshall
Paul Dean
Stewart Oades
David Radcliffe
Martin Sawkins
Gill Barr

Opening
20,000
10,000
19,367
25,000
9,790
–

Purchased
–
–
–
–
–
–

Disposed
–
–
–
–
–
–

Closing
20,0001
10,000
19,367
25,000
9,790
–

1  Steve Marshall’s closing share interests are provided as at the date of his resignation, which is deemed to be 29 September 2017 following his death.

There were no changes in the Non-executive Directors’ personal holdings between 1 April 2018 and the date of this report.

Dilution limits
All share/option awards are made under plans that incorporate dilution limits consistent with the guidelines provided by the Investment Association. 
These limits are 10% in any rolling 10 year period for all share plans and 5% in any rolling 10 year period for executive share plans and are in relation  
to new issue shares. Estimated dilution from existing awards made over the last 10 years up to 31 March 2018 is as follows:

All employee share plans
Executive share plans

Actual
2.6%
2.5%

Limit
10%
5%

51

Strategic reportGovernanceDirectors’ remuneration reportDirectors’ reportIndependent auditor’s reportAccountsWincanton plc Annual Report and Accounts 2018DIRECTORS’ REMUNERATION POLICY

DIRECTORS’ REMUNERATION POLICY
The Committee regularly reviews the Directors’ 
Remuneration Policy to ensure it supports 
shareholder interests and closely reflects 
business strategy. When setting the Directors’ 
Remuneration Policy, the Committee considers 
the following:

•  business strategy;
•  total remuneration levels operating in 

companies of a similar size and complexity 
such as:
 – revenue and scale of operation;
 – number of employees;

 – market capitalisation and enterprise value;
 – customer base; and
 – geographic reach;

•  the responsibilities of each individual role;
•  individual performance; and
•  each individual’s experience.

The Directors’ Remuneration Policy was 
approved by a binding shareholder vote 
at the 2017 AGM and took effect from 
1 July 2017. This section presents the full 
Policy, for ease of reference. The sections 
presented are as disclosed in the 2016/17 

Directors’ Remuneration Report, save the 
following changes: 

•  References to financial years have been 

updated where appropriate;

•  Pay scenario charts have been updated  

to reflect the latest salaries; and

•  Details of current Non-Executive Directors’ 

letters of appointment.

DIRECTORS’ REMUNERATION POLICY
Executive Directors
Salary
Purpose and link 
to strategy
Operation

Salaries are set at a sufficient level to recruit and retain individuals of the necessary quality to deliver the Group’s strategy.

Base salaries are normally reviewed annually, with changes effective 1 July.

Salaries are typically set after considering:

•  the responsibilities of each individual role;
•  progression within role;
•  individual performance;
•  an individual’s experience; and
•  salary levels in companies of a similar size and complexity.

Salaries may be adjusted and any increase will ordinarily be (in percentage of salary terms) in line with those of the 
wider workforce.

Increases beyond those granted to the wider workforce may be awarded in certain circumstances such as:

•  where there is a change in responsibility;
•  progression in the role;
•  material market misalignment; or
•  a significant increase in the scale of the role and/or size, value and/or complexity of the Group.

Where increases are awarded in excess of the wider employee population, the Committee will provide an explanation  
in the relevant Annual Report on Remuneration.

Benefits
Purpose and link 
to strategy
Operation

The Group provides the appropriate benefits for Executive Directors in a business of this size in order to recruit and retain 
individuals of the necessary quality to deliver the Group’s strategy.
Benefits include but are not limited to:

•  Company car or car allowance;
•  Private medical insurance for the Executive Director and their direct family;
•  Personal accident and travel insurance; and
•  Death in service cover.

In addition, relocation assistance is available on a case by case basis. Assistance may include, but is not limited to, facilitating 
and/or meeting the costs of removal and other relocation costs, children’s education, a limited amount of family travel  
and tax equalisation arrangements and may extend to facilitating and/or meeting the costs of re-establishing them to their 
previous location at the end of the employment or assignment.
Benefits vary by role and individual circumstance and eligibility is reviewed periodically. Benefits are not anticipated to 
exceed 10% of salary per annum over the period for which this policy applies. The Committee retains the discretion to 
approve a higher cost in exceptional circumstances (eg relocation) or in circumstances where factors outside of the Group’s 
control have materially changed (eg costs of medical premiums). If this occurs, the Committee will provide details and 
rationale in the relevant Annual Report on Remuneration.

Opportunity

52

Directors’ remuneration reportWincanton plc Annual Report and Accounts 2018All employee share plans
Purpose and link 
to strategy
Operation of all 
employee share plans

The Company encourages voluntary participation in share ownership throughout the Group where share plans 
are appropriate.
Under the current all employee share plan arrangements, Executive Directors are entitled to participate in the Company’s 
Share Incentive Plan (SIP).

Opportunity

Participants make monthly contributions from their gross salary to buy Partnership Shares. The Company currently awards 
one Matching Share for every four Partnership Shares acquired. In addition, any dividends paid in respect of shares held 
under the SIP are used to buy Dividend Shares.
In line with HMRC limits, the rules of the Company’s SIP set out the following maximum levels, which may be amended  
from time to time so that they are in line with legislation:

Free Shares – The maximum value of Free Shares per tax year is £3,600.

Partnership Shares bought by employees – The maximum pre-tax salary that can be used to buy Partnership Shares is 
£1,800 per annum.

Matching Shares – The Company can match employees’ Partnership Share purchases by giving them additional shares. 
The maximum award of Matching Shares is two Matching Shares for each Partnership Share bought. The Company currently 
awards one Matching Share for every four Partnership Shares bought.

The Group provides the appropriate pension provision for Executive Directors in a business of this size in order to recruit and 
retain individuals of the necessary quality to deliver the Group’s strategy.
Executive Directors are entitled to join the defined contribution section of the Wincanton plc Pension Scheme. In certain 
circumstances, for example where the annual allowance level set by HMRC is exceeded, the pension provision will be in the 
form of a taxable cash supplement.
Up to 22% of pensionable salary for existing Directors, reducing to 15% of pensionable salary for appointments of Executive 
Directors from 1 July 2017.

The aim of the annual bonus is to incentivise and recognise the Executive Directors annual contribution to the delivery 
of the Group’s strategy by rewarding performance against stretching financial and personal objectives; and reinforce 
achievement of the shareholding requirement.
Performance is measured over each financial year. Performance measure weightings and individual objectives are 
reviewed prior to the start of the financial year to ensure they remain appropriate and reinforce the business strategy. 
Performance targets are set annually to ensure they are appropriately stretching and reflect those strategic objectives.  
At the end of the year, the Committee determines the extent to which these targets were achieved.

Pension
Purpose and link 
to strategy
Operation of 
pension arrangements

Opportunity

Annual Bonus
Purpose and link 
to strategy

Operation

The annual bonus is normally settled in cash. However, if the share ownership guideline is yet to be achieved, any annual 
bonus earned above 100% of salary must be used by the Executive Director to purchase Wincanton shares until the share 
ownership guideline is achieved. All bonus awards are at the discretion of the Committee.
An Executive Director’s annual bonus cannot exceed 150% of salary.

Opportunity

Performance measure

A bonus of up to 25% of maximum is payable for ‘Threshold’ performance, 50% of maximum for ‘Target’ performance  
and up to 100% of the bonus is earned for ‘Maximum’ performance, with straight-line vesting in between.
Annual performance is typically based on achievement of profit targets and personal objectives.

Normally, the Committee would expect the profit element to have a minimum weighting of 60% and a maximum 
weighting of 80%, and achievement of personal objectives to have a minimum weighting of 20% and a maximum 
weighting of 40%. However, it retains discretion to adjust weightings to align with the business plan for each year.

In exceptional circumstances, the Committee have the ability to exercise discretion to override the formulaic bonus outcome 
within the limits of the plan where it believes the outcome is not truly reflective of performance and to ensure fairness to 
both shareholders and participants.
Clawback and malus provisions exist in respect of misstatements and misconduct.

Recovery provisions

53

Strategic reportGovernanceDirectors’ remuneration reportDirectors’ reportIndependent auditor’s reportAccountsWincanton plc Annual Report and Accounts 2018DIRECTORS’ REMUNERATION POLICY CONTINUED

Long term incentives
Purpose and link 
to strategy

Operation

Opportunity

The aim of the long term incentive is to incentivise and recognise the performance of Executive Directors in respect of their 
contribution to the delivery of the Group’s strategy over the longer term by rewarding strong financial performance and 
sustained increase in shareholder value.
Performance is measured over a period of no less than three years.

The Committee reviews the performance measure weightings ahead of each award to ensure alignment with Wincanton’s 
strategy and has discretion to adjust weightings to ensure alignment to that strategy. Performance targets are reviewed 
ahead of each performance period and the Committee has discretion to adjust targets to ensure they remain appropriate 
and stretching. Targets are set having regard to a number of internal and external reference points.

Awards may be granted as nil cost options or conditional share awards. Dividends or dividend equivalents may accrue  
on LTIP awards and be paid in shares or cash on those shares which vest.
Maximum award levels for Executive Directors are 100% of salary. In exceptional circumstances, for example on recruitment, 
individual awards may be granted up to 250% of salary.

Up to 25% of an award vests for ‘Threshold’ performance and 100% of an award vests for ‘Maximum’ performance.

Performance measures Performance measures for 2018 awards will be TSR relative to an appropriate comparator group and EPS growth, weighted 

40% and 60% respectively. The Committee will review the performance measures, their weightings and performance 
targets in advance of each award to ensure alignment with strategy.

Recovery provisions

In exceptional circumstances, the Committee has the ability to exercise discretion to override the formulaic performance 
outcome downwards to ensure alignment of pay with the underlying performance of the business during the 
performance period.
Clawback and malus provisions exist in respect of vested and unvested awards in circumstances of misstatement 
and misconduct.

Shareholding guidelines
Purpose and link 
to strategy
Operation

Shareholding guidelines ensure alignment between Executive Directors and shareholders.

Shareholding guidelines are for any new Executive Director to accrue and then maintain a holding of shares with a value  
of 150% of their salary as assessed by the Committee from time to time. For Executive Directors in place before 1 April 2015, 
the shareholding guideline is 300% of salary. Any bonus achieved in excess of 100% of salary will be required to be used  
to purchase shares until the shareholding guideline is met.

Non-executive Directors
Purpose and link 
to strategy
Operation

The Company seeks to attract and retain a high calibre Chairman and Non-executive Directors by offering market 
competitive fee levels.
On the appointment of a new Chairman or Non-executive Director, the fees will be set taking into account the experience 
and calibre of the individual.

Neither the Chairman nor the Non-executive Directors participate in any of the Company’s short or long term incentive 
arrangements, nor do they receive benefits or pension provision. They are however, reimbursed for reasonable costs 
incurred in carrying out their role.

The Chairman receives an annual fee. The Non-executive Directors receive an annual base fee and additional fees are paid  
to reflect additional responsibilities, such as chairing a Board Committee.

The Chairman and Non-executive Directors receive their annual fee paid in monthly instalments. The fee of the Chairman  
is set by the Committee and the fees of the Non-executive Directors are approved by the Board, on the recommendation  
of the Chairman and Chief Executive.
Fee levels are reviewed on a periodic basis, and may be increased taking into account factors such as the time commitment 
of the role and market levels in companies of a similar size and complexity. Fees for the Chairman and Non-executive 
Directors will not exceed the limit as set out in the Company’s Articles of Association (£500,000 in aggregate as at the date  
of this report).

Opportunity

54

Directors’ remuneration reportWincanton plc Annual Report and Accounts 2018NOTES TO THE DIRECTORS’ 
REMUNERATION POLICY
These notes are intended to provide guidance 
on the Directors’ Remuneration Policy to aid 
understanding of its practical application 
and are reviewed annually. No change to 
the explanations represent a change to the 
Directors’ Remuneration Policy.

Incentives
For the Annual Bonus, the profit performance 
reflects the basis on which the Group is 
managed: sustained profit performance 
improvement should enable the Group to 
improve its balance sheet to maintain a sound 
financial position and secure the long term 
success of the Group for the benefit of all of 
its stakeholders.

For the Long Term Incentive, the Committee 
believes EPS provides a good line of sight 
for Executive Directors, and that relative TSR 
aligns Executive Director remuneration with 
shareholder interests and takes into account 
the impact of external environment changes 
on Company performance. Ahead of each 
performance cycle, the Committee may 
review and adjust the TSR comparator group 
for future cycles to ensure relevance to 
Wincanton. The Committee may adjust the TSR 
comparator group of outstanding cycles in the 
event that a TSR comparator ceases to exist, 
de-lists or is acquired or the Committee deems 
it to be no longer a suitable comparator.

The performance measures applying to 
awards are reviewed ahead of each award to 
ensure they continue to support shareholders’ 
interests and are appropriately aligned to 
Wincanton’s long term strategy.

When setting performance targets for short 
and long term incentives, the Committee 
considers a range of internal and external 
reference points: such as the Company’s 
strategic plan, consensus market forecasts, past 
Company performance and the performance 
ranges for comparator companies. 
The Committee then sets incentive targets that 
are stretching and achievable.

By measuring the personal performance of 
an Executive Director, the Committee is able 
to monitor performance against other key 
strategic objectives.

Incentive Plan discretions
The Committee operates the Company’s 
incentive plans according to their respective 
rules and Remuneration Policy, and in 
accordance with the Listing Rules and HMRC 
rules where relevant.

In line with common market practice, the 
Committee retains discretion as to the 
operation and administration of these incentive 
plans, including with respect to:

•  who participates;
•  the timing of grant and/or payment;
•  the size of an award and/or payment (within 
the plan limits approved by shareholders);

•  the manner in which awards are settled;
•  the choice of (and adjustment of) 

performance measures and targets in 
accordance with the Remuneration Policy  
set out above and the plan rules;

•  in exceptional circumstances, amendment 
of any performance conditions applying to 
an award – provided the new performance 
conditions are considered fair and reasonable, 
and are neither materially more nor 
materially less challenging than the original 
performance targets when set;

•  discretion relating to the measurement 

of performance in the event of a variation 
of share capital, change of control, special 
dividend, distribution or any other corporate 
event which may affect the current or future 
value of an award;

•  determination of a good leaver (in addition 

to any specified categories) for incentive-plan 
purposes, based on the plan rules and the 
appropriate treatment under the plan rules; 
and

•  adjustments required in certain 

circumstances (eg rights issues, share 
buybacks, special dividends, other corporate 
events, etc.).

Any use of the above discretions would, where 
relevant, be explained in the Annual Report on 
Remuneration. As appropriate, it might also be 
the subject of consultation with the Company’s 
major shareholders.

Minor changes
The Committee may make minor amendments 
to the Policy set out above (for regulatory, 
exchange control, tax or administrative 
purposes or to take account of a change in 
legislation) without requiring prior shareholder 
approval for that amendment.

Payments from existing awards
Any commitment made prior to, but due to 
be fulfilled after 1 July 2017 (being the date 
on which the Policy became effective) will 
be honoured. 

Differences between the 
Remuneration Policy for Executive 
Directors and employees generally
Pay mix – The Directors’ Remuneration Policy 
is more heavily weighted towards variable pay 
than for other employees, to make a greater 
part of their pay conditional on the delivery 
of the Company’s strategy and performance. 
Wincanton’s approach to salary reviews is 
consistent across the Group.

Bonus – The eligibility to participate and 
receive a bonus, and the level of bonus 
available, is dependent on the role and level 
of seniority within the business and Group 
structure. During the year, the Company 
operated two bonus schemes for senior talent, 
the Annual Bonus Plan (ABP) for executive 
management and a General Management 
Bonus Scheme. In addition, some employees 
are eligible for a bonus depending on the 
customer contract on which they work and 
for new business won under a Super Sales 
Bonus Scheme.

Long term incentives – Up to 30 senior 
managers in the Group, such as the Executive 
Directors and other senior employees with key 
skills and experience or that perform key roles 
which significantly drive value in the Group, 
are annually awarded LTIPs. Such awards are 
intended to encourage sustainable long term 
value generation and align senior employees’ 
interests with our shareholders.

Pensions – All employees, including the 
Executive Directors, are eligible to become 
members of one of the defined contribution 
sections of the Wincanton plc Pension Scheme. 
The level of employers’ pension contribution 
for employees is determined by their level 
of seniority and/or age. The Remuneration 
Committee has ensured the maximum 
pension employer contribution is aligned 
between the Executive Directors and the 
senior management population, being the 
highest maximum level of employer pension 
contribution, by reducing the maximum 
contribution for new Executive Directors to 
the same level as senior management in the 
Directors’ Remuneration Policy which became 
effective from 1 July 2017.

Share Incentive Plan – The Company 
operates a tax-advantaged SIP and actively 
promotes SIP participation to all employees 
to align their interests to delivery of Group 
strategy and performance by providing the 
opportunity to become shareholders in order 
to share in the Group’s growth and success. 
Within the SIP all participants are currently 
eligible to receive one matched share for every 
four shares purchased.

55

Strategic reportGovernanceDirectors’ remuneration reportDirectors’ reportIndependent auditor’s reportAccountsWincanton plc Annual Report and Accounts 2018Executive Directors’ service contracts
All Executive Directors are appointed on 
the basis of a 12 month rolling period in 
accordance with the Companies Act 2006, 
subject to election and annual re-election  
by the Company’s shareholders at the AGM.

Under the Executive Directors’ service 
contracts, the Company is required to give 
12 months’ notice and the Executive Director 
six months’ notice of termination.

DIRECTORS’ REMUNERATION POLICY CONTINUED

Employment conditions elsewhere  
in the Group
When making remuneration decisions, to 
ensure there is a fair and consistent approach 
to remuneration, the Committee considers pay 
and employment conditions across the Group, 
such as determination of salary increases to 
Executive Directors with reference to the 
range of base pay increases within the Group. 
The Committee also reviews base salaries, 
pension provision, annual bonuses and LTIP 
awards for the EMT.

The Committee does not formally consult with 
employees on a routine basis but does so if any 
significant changes to Group remuneration 
and employment policies are proposed. 
The Committee receives information on the 
annual base salary reviews across the Group 
and the annual bonus and LTIP awards made to 
employees that report into the EMT and below. 
The Committee members, as Directors, receive 
the annual employee consultation results 
which are presented to the Board.

Consideration of shareholders’ views
The Committee considers best practice 
developments and publications from 
institutional investors and shareholder bodies 
as well as any shareholder views expressed 
during dialogue. The Committee is committed 
to maintaining an open and consultative 
dialogue with Company shareholders and 
shareholder bodies and intends to consult 
extensively when reviewing or making 
substantive changes to the Directors’ 
Remuneration Policy. 

Remuneration on recruitment  
of an Executive Director
When making an appointment of a new 
Director, including by way of internal 
promotion, remuneration packages and 
fees are set in accordance with the Directors’ 
Remuneration Policy.

To determine the appropriate remuneration 
for a new Executive Director, the Committee 
will consider relevant factors such as: the 
experience and calibre of the individual, 
the quantum/nature of remuneration, the 
jurisdiction from which the candidate was 
recruited, the role requirements, and the 
market benchmark. Initial salaries may be set 
below market rate and consideration given 
to phasing any increases over two or three 
years subject to development in the role. 
Normal variable pay will be subject to the 
maximums set out in the tables within the 
Directors’ Remuneration Policy on page 58. 

The Committee may consider it is appropriate 
to grant one off awards to compensate new 
Executive Directors in respect of incentive 
arrangements forfeited when leaving a 
former employer. In doing so, the Committee 
would consider relevant factors, including: 
the structure of the awards forfeited; the 
strength of the performance conditions 
attached to those awards; and the likelihood 
of those conditions being met. To the 
extent that it is not possible or practical to 
provide compensation within the terms 
of the Company’s existing incentive plans, 
a bespoke arrangement could be created 
in accordance with the discretion permitted 
to the Committee under the Listing Rules. 
Compensation for forfeited awards would  
only be considered on a matching fair value 
basis. When the Company announces an 
Executive Director appointment, if applicable,  
it will provide an explanation of the reasons  
for a compensation award being granted,  
and a breakdown of that payment.

In the case of an internal promotion, any 
outstanding variable pay awarded in relation 
to the previous role will be continued on the 
original terms.

56

Directors’ remuneration reportWincanton plc Annual Report and Accounts 2018Executive Directors’ service contracts
Details of employment contracts for the Executive Directors are summarised in the table below:

Executive Director
Adrian Colman
Tim Lawlor

Date of appointment  
to the Board
7 January 2013
28 September 2015

Date of current contract
5 July 2015
6 July 2015

Notice period (Company)
12 months
12 months

Notice period (Director)
6 months
6 months

Unexpired term
Rolling 12 months
Rolling 12 months

Adrian Colman was appointed as Chief Executive of the Company on 1 August 2015 and therefore his service contract was refreshed to reflect his new 
role and remuneration. Both Directors’ service contracts are compliant in all respects with the Directors’ Remuneration Policy.

The service contract for each Executive Director is available for inspection by shareholders at the Company’s registered office and will be available  
at the 2018 AGM.

NON-EXECUTIVE DIRECTORS’ LETTERS OF APPOINTMENT
The Chairman and Non-executive Directors’ terms of appointment are recorded in letters of appointment. All Directors are subject to re-election 
every three years in accordance with the Company’s Articles of Association. However, in line with corporate governance best practice, all Directors 
currently put themselves forward for annual re-election at each AGM.

The table sets out the appointment dates and terms for the Non-executive Directors during the year.

Non-executive Director
Gill Barr
Paul Dean
Stewart Oades
Martin Sawkins
David Radcliffe

Date of appointment
15 September 2017
1 February 2015
1 November 2014
27 July 2012
27 July 2012

Date of original letter  
of appointment
12 September 2017
21 January 2015
30 October 2014
22 June 2012
22 June 2012

Effective date of current letter 
of appointment
12 September 2017
21 January 2015
30 October 2014
27 July 2015
27 July 2015

Unexpired term1
28 months
1 month
1 month
2 months
2 months

Expiry of current term
15 September 2020
28 June 2018
28 June 2018
27 July 2018
27 July 2018

1  The unexpired terms are shown as full months from date of this report.

The Non-executive Directors’ letters of appointment are available for inspection by shareholders at the Company’s registered office and will be 
available at the 2018 AGM.

Payments on termination and change of control
If notice is served by either party, the Executive Director can continue to receive basic salary, taxable benefits and pension provision for the duration 
of their notice period during which time the Company may require the individual to continue to fulfil their current duties or may assign a period 
of ‘garden leave’. The Committee will take account of an Executive Director’s duty to mitigate their loss. There are no other arrangements in place 
between the Company and its Directors that provide for remuneration for loss of office following a change of control of the Company.

In addition to the contractual provisions regarding payment on termination, the Group’s incentive plans and share schemes contain provisions for 
termination of employment, based on ‘good leaver’ and ‘bad leaver’ treatment. Good leavers are typically defined as participants who leave early on 
account of injury, disability or ill health, death, a sale of their employer or business in which they were employed, statutory redundancy, retirement,  
or any other reason at the discretion of the Committee. Bad leavers are employees that leave for any other reason. In circumstances of termination  
on notice the Committee will determine an equitable remuneration package, having regard to the particular circumstances of the case.

For good leavers, payment of an annual bonus is normally tested on full financial year performance and the amount payable is then pro rated for the 
period worked by the Executive Director in the financial year. There is no provision for an amount in lieu of bonus to be payable for any part of the 
notice period not worked, with Committee discretion to treat otherwise. Bad leavers lose any right to the annual bonus.

A good leaver would not forfeit long term incentive awards on cessation of employment. The awards would continue to be held by the good leaver 
until vest, on the normal vesting date or earlier at the discretion of the Committee, subject to satisfaction of the performance conditions of the award. 
Awards would be adjusted pro rata for the amount of vesting period worked by the Executive Director, unless the Committee determines otherwise. 
Bad leavers would forfeit all unvested long term incentive awards held.

If employment is terminated by the Company, the departing Executive Director may have a legal entitlement (under statute or otherwise) to 
additional amounts which would need to be met, for example in a redundancy situation. In addition, the Committee retains discretion to settle any 
other amounts reasonably due to the Executive Director, for example to meet the legal fees incurred by the Executive Director in connection with the 
termination of employment, where the Company wishes to enter into a settlement agreement (as provided for below) and the individual must seek 
independent legal advice.

In certain circumstances, the Committee may approve new contractual arrangements with departing Executive Directors including, but not limited 
to, settlement, confidentiality, restrictive covenants and/or consultancy arrangements. These are intended to be used in exceptional circumstances 
and only would be entered into where the Committee believed that it was in the best interests of the Company and its shareholders to do so.

In the event of a change of control, all unvested awards under the long term incentive arrangements would vest to the extent that any performance 
conditions attached to the relevant awards have been achieved. The awards would, unless the Committee determines otherwise, be pro rated for  
the amount of time worked by the Executive Director prior to the change of control. Alternatively, unvested long term incentive arrangements may 
not vest on a change of control and may be replaced by an equivalent new award determined by the acquiring Company.

57

Strategic reportGovernanceDirectors’ remuneration reportDirectors’ reportIndependent auditor’s reportAccountsWincanton plc Annual Report and Accounts 2018DIRECTORS’ REMUNERATION POLICY CONTINUED

Letters of appointment for Non-executive Directors
The Chairman and Non-executive Directors’ terms of appointment are set out in their respective letters of appointment. All Directors are subject to 
re-election every three years in accordance with the Company’s Articles of Association. In line with corporate governance best practice, all Directors 
currently put themselves forward for annual re-election at each AGM. The required notice period is six months’ written notice from either party.  
Non-executive Directors are not entitled to any remuneration on loss of office.

EXTERNAL APPOINTMENTS
Executive Directors are able to perform one Non-executive Directorship outside the Company with the consent of the Board. Any fees received 
may be retained by the Director.

Illustrations of application of the Remuneration Policy
The charts below set out how much the Chief Executive and Chief Financial Officer could earn under the Remuneration Policy in the year ending 
31 March 2019.

The scenarios in these charts exclude the impact of any share price appreciation and accrual of dividends or dividend equivalents.

Remuneration receivable for different performance scenarios

Fixed pay

Fixed
•  Salary effective from 1 July 2018 as disclosed in the Annual Report on Remuneration on page 45.
•  Pensions per Remuneration Policy and taxable benefits as provided in the single total figure of remuneration  

Maximum

Target

table in the Annual Report on Remuneration on page 45.

Annual bonus

Nil payout

LTIP

Nil payout

Bonus award at 50% of 
maximum opportunity
Threshold LTIP vesting at 25% 
of opportunity

Payout of 100% of award

Full LTIP vesting

Chief Executive

Fixed

100%

Target

56%

£568,851

33%

11%

£1,013,802

Fixed pay
Bonus
LTIP

Maximum

34%

40%

26%

£1,681,226

Fixed pay 

Annual bonus

LTIP

Chief Financial Officer

Fixed

100%

Target

59%

£372,876

29%

12%

£636,015

Fixed pay
Bonus
LTIP

Maximum

36%

35%

29%

£1,053,941

Fixed pay 

Annual bonus

LTIP

Fixed 
£
568,851
–
–
568,851

Fixed 
£
372,876
–
–
372,876

Target 
£
568,851
333,713
111,238
1,013,802

Target 
£
372,876
185,745
77,394
636,015

Maximum 
£
568,851
667,425
444,950
1,681,226

Maximum 
£
372,876
371,490
309,575
1,053,941

58

Directors’ remuneration reportWincanton plc Annual Report and Accounts 2018DIRECTORS’ REPORT

DIRECTORS’ REPORT
The Company
Wincanton plc is a company incorporated 
in England and Wales, with company 
number 04178808.

Constitution
The Company’s Articles of Association may 
only be amended by a special resolution  
at a general meeting of shareholders.

Principal activities
Wincanton plc is the ultimate parent Company 
of the Group and trades principally through 
its subsidiary undertakings. The Group is a 
leading provider of logistics and supply chain 
solutions in the UK and Ireland. All subsidiaries 
of the Company are listed in Note 11 on pages 
85 and 86.

Review of business and future developments
The business review and details of future 
developments are contained within the 
Strategic Report on pages 1 to 31.

Compliance Reporting
Directors’ Report content
The Strategic Report, Corporate Governance 
Report and Directors’ Remuneration report are 
all incorporated by reference into this report 
and accordingly, should be read as part of 
this report.

Strategic report
The Company is required to prepare a Strategic 
Report to give a balanced and fair review of 
the Group’s business during the year ended 
31 March 2018, to enable shareholders to assess 
how the Directors have performed their duty 
under Section 172 of the Companies Act 2006.

The information that fulfils the requirements  
of the Strategic Report can be found on pages 
1 to 31, and includes reviews of the business 
and financial performance and the principal 
risks and uncertainties facing the Group. 

Within the Strategic Report, a summary review 
of the Group’s activities during the financial 
year along with its future prospects are 
contained in the Interim Chairman’s review on 
page 3. Details of the Group’s business goals, 
strategy and model are set out on pages 8 
to 10.

Corporate Governance reporting
Details of the Company’s compliance with the 
Code, the disclosures required under the Code 
and the UK Listing Rules can be found in the 
Annual Report on Remuneration on page 44. 
The corporate governance statement required 
by Rule 7.2.1 of the FCA’s Disclosure Guidance 
and Transparency Rules is set out on page 36.

Management report
For the purposes of Rule 4.1.5R(2) and Rule 
4.18 of the FCA’s Disclosure Guidance and 
Transparency Rules, this Directors’ Report and 
the Strategic Report on pages 59 to 61 and 1 to 
31 together comprise the Management report.

Accounting policies, financial instruments 
and risk 
Details of the Group’s accounting policies, 
together with details of financial instruments 
and financial risks are provided in Note 26 of 
the Group financial statements, on pages 96 
to 99.

Directors
The Directors during the year and to the date  
of this report, are:

Executive Directors
Adrian Colman, Chief Executive Officer 
Tim Lawlor, Chief Financial Officer

Non-executive Directors
Stewart Oades, Interim Chairman  
Paul Dean  
David Radcliffe  
Martin Sawkins 
Gill Barr

The rules governing the appointment and 
replacement of Directors are set out in the 
Company’s Articles of Association.

At the 2018 AGM, six of the Directors will retire 
and offer themselves for re-election and Gill 
Barr is proposed for election to the Board in 
accordance with the Code. Biographical details 
of all Directors are set out on pages 32 and 33.

Details of the service contracts of the Executive 
Directors and the letters of appointment for 
the Non-executive Directors are set out in the 
Directors’ Remuneration Policy on page 57. 

Financial Disclosures
Going concern
After making enquiries, the Directors have a 
reasonable expectation that the Company 
and the Group have adequate resources to 
continue in business for the foreseeable future. 
The financial statements are therefore prepared 
on a going concern basis. Further details 
of the Group’s liquidity position and going 
concern review are provided in Notes 26 and 1 
respectively to the Group financial statements.

Results and dividends
The Group profit attributable to equity 
shareholders for the financial year amounted to 
£31.2m. The Directors propose a final dividend 
of 6.63p per Ordinary Share for the year ended 
31 March 2018 (2017: 6.1p per Ordinary Share). 
If approved by the shareholders at the 2018 
AGM, this would bring the total dividend paid 
for the year ended 31 March 2018 to £12.3m.

Contracts and transactions
The Company is not aware of any significant 
agreements to which it is party that take 
effect, alter or terminate upon a change of 
control of the Company following a takeover. 
The Company is not aware of any contractual 
or other agreement, which is essential to 
its business and should be disclosed in this 
Directors’ report.

Events after the balance sheet date
There were no reportable events after the 
balance sheet date.

Equity Disclosures
Share capital
The Company issued 796,377 Ordinary shares 
of 10p each in the year ending 31 March 2018.
The Company’s issued share capital as the date 
of this report was 124,543,670 Ordinary shares 
of 10p each. 

Authority to purchase shares
The Company was authorised at the 2017 AGM 
to purchase its own shares within certain limits. 
During the year ended 31 March 2018, the 
Company purchased 850,000 of its own shares 
under this authority. All shares purchased 
were gifted to the Company’s Employee 
Benefit Trust to satisfy future exercise of awards 
under the Company’s employee incentive 
schemes. The Directors will seek renewal 
of their authority to purchase in the market 
the Company’s shares at the 2018 AGM.

Shareholders’ rights
Each Ordinary Share of the Company carries 
one vote at general meetings of the Company. 
There are no restrictions on the transfer of 
Ordinary Shares in the capital of the Company 
other than certain restrictions, which may from 
time to time be imposed by law. In accordance 
with the Listing Rules of the Financial Conduct 
Authority, certain employees are required 
to seek approval of the Company to deal in 
its shares.

Employees who participate in the SIP, whose 
shares are held in the Employee Benefit Trust, 
give directions to the trustees to vote on their 
behalf by way of a Form of Direction.

The Company is not aware of any agreements 
between shareholders that may result in 
restrictions on the transfer of securities and/or 
voting rights.

59

Strategic reportGovernanceDirectors’ remuneration reportDirectors’ reportIndependent auditor’s reportAccountsDirectors’ reportWincanton plc Annual Report and Accounts 2018DIRECTORS’ REPORT CONTINUED

Shareholder
Aberforth Partners
Columbia Threadneedle Investments
Schroder Investment Management
Unicorn Asset Management
M&G Investment Management
Polar Capital
Tellworth Investments

Substantial shareholdings
At the date of this report, the Company has 
been notified of the major shareholdings set 
out in the table above. Both the number of 
shares held and the percentage holding are 
stated as at the latest date of notification to 
the Company.

Greenhouse gas emissions
The disclosures concerning greenhouse gas 
emissions required by law are included in the 
Corporate Responsibility Report, on page 23.

Charitable donations
During the year ended 31 March 2018, 
the Group contributed £nil (2017: £38k) to 
charitable and community programmes. 

Political donations
No political donations were made during the 
year (2017: nil).

Annual General Meeting
The Company’s seventeenth AGM will be held 
at 11:00am on Thursday, 28 June 2018 at the 
offices of Buchanan Communications, 107 
Cheapside, London EC2V 6DN. The Notice 
of Annual General Meeting 2018, which 
contains full explanations of the business to be 
conducted at the AGM, is set out in a separate 
AGM Notice addressed to shareholders, and 
can be found on the Company’s website 
(www.wincanton.co.uk).

External Auditor
At the 2017 AGM, resolutions to re-appoint 
KPMG LLP as the Company’s Auditor 
and to authorise the Directors to fix their 
remuneration, were approved by shareholders.

The Board will propose a resolution at the 
2018 AGM for shareholders to approve the 
re-appointment of KPMG LLP as the Company’s 
Auditor for the year ended 31 March 2019 and 
authority to fix their remuneration.

60

Type of  
holding
Indirect
Indirect
Indirect
Indirect
Indirect
Indirect
Indirect

Number of 
shares held
21,223,767
19,801,055
11,214,447
5,500,000
4,839,992
4,580,893
4,063,001

Holding  
(% of issued 
share capital)
17.04
15.90
9.00
4.42
3.89
3.68
3.26

Employee Disclosures
Wincanton is an inclusive and equal 
opportunities employer. The Group is 
committed to ensuring that disabled persons 
are treated with dignity and respect and 
that we act in accordance with the Equality 
Act 2010.  Wincanton gives full and fair 
consideration to applications for employment 
by disabled persons and provides the 
necessary support to colleagues in our 
employment with a disability. Training, career 
development and promotion are equally 
applied regardless of disability or any other 
individual attribute.

On behalf of the Board

Raj Sharma
Company Secretary 
16 May 2018

STATEMENT OF DIRECTORS’ 
RESPONSIBILITIES
The Directors are responsible for preparing 
the Annual Report and Group and parent 
Company financial statements in accordance 
with applicable law and regulations.

Company law requires the Directors to 
prepare Group and parent Company financial 
statements for each financial year. Under that 
law, they are required to prepare the Group 
financial statements in accordance with 
International Financial Reporting Standards 
as adopted by the European Union (IFRSs as 
adopted by the EU) and applicable law and 
have elected to prepare the parent Company 
financial statements in accordance with UK 
Accounting Standards, including FRS 101 
Reduced Disclosure Framework.

Under company law, the Directors must not 
approve the financial statements unless they 
are satisfied that they give a true and fair view 
of the state of affairs of the Group and parent 
Company and of their profit or loss for that 
period. In preparing each of the Group and 
parent Company financial statements, the 
Directors are required to:

•  select suitable accounting policies and then 

apply them consistently;

•  make judgements and estimates that are 
reasonable, relevant, reliable and prudent;
•  for the Group financial statements, state 
whether they have been prepared in 
accordance with IFRSs as adopted by the EU;
•  for the parent Company financial statements, 

state whether applicable UK Accounting 
Standards have been followed, subject to any 
material departures disclosed and explained 
in the parent Company financial statements;

•  assess the Group and parent Company’s 
ability to continue as a going concern, 
disclosing, as applicable, matters related to 
going concern; and 

•  use the going concern basis of accounting 
unless they either intend to liquidate the 
Group or the parent Company or to cease 
operations, or have no realistic alternative  
but to do so.

The Directors are responsible for keeping 
adequate accounting records that are 
sufficient to show and explain the parent 
Company’s transactions and disclose with 
reasonable accuracy at any time the financial 
position of the parent Company and enable 
them to ensure that its financial statements 
comply with the Companies Act 2006. 
They are responsible for such internal control 
as they determine is necessary to enable the 
preparation of financial statements that are free 
from material misstatement, whether due to 
fraud or error, and have general responsibility 
for taking such steps as are reasonably 
open to them to safeguard the assets of the 
Group and to prevent and detect fraud and 
other irregularities.

Directors’ reportWincanton plc Annual Report and Accounts 2018Under applicable law and regulations, the 
Directors are also responsible for preparing  
a Strategic Report, Directors’ Report, Directors’ 
Remuneration Report and Corporate 
Governance Statement that comply with  
that law and those regulations.

The Directors are responsible for the 
maintenance and integrity of the corporate 
and financial information included on the 
Company’s website. Legislation in the UK 
governing the preparation and dissemination 
of financial statements may differ from 
legislation in other jurisdictions.

Responsibility statement of the 
Directors in respect of the annual 
financial report 
We confirm that to the best of our knowledge:

•  the financial statements, prepared in 
accordance with the applicable set of 
accounting standards, give a true and fair 
view of the assets, liabilities, financial position 
and profit or loss of the Company and the 
undertakings included in the consolidation 
taken as a whole; and

•  the Strategic Report and the Directors’ 

Report include a fair review of the 
development and performance of the 
business and the position of the issuer 
and the undertakings included in the 
consolidation taken as a whole, together 
with a description of the principal risks and 
uncertainties that they face.

We consider the Annual Report and Accounts, 
taken as a whole, is fair, balanced and 
understandable and provides the information 
necessary for shareholders to assess the 
Group’s position and performance, business 
model and strategy.

The Directors approved the above 
responsibility statement on 16 May 2018.

Tim Lawlor
Chief Financial Officer

Wincanton plc 
Registered in England and Wales No. 04178808

STATEMENT ON THE MODERN 
SLAVERY ACT
Wincanton is committed to the highest 
possible ethical standards and corporate 
conduct and we expect our suppliers to adhere 
to these same standards. The Group requires 
companies across our extended supply chain 
to understand and meet our expectations on 
anti-bribery, corruption, legal compliance and 
ethical conduct. 

To this end, the following statement is offered 
in compliance with the Modern Slavery Act 
2015 and sets out the Group’s approach to 

the prohibition of any form of forced labour or 
slavery within our supply chain. 

Once the law came into effect in 2015, 
Wincanton carefully reviewed its employment 
and procurement practices to ensure they 
were in line with the new legal requirements. 
The Group laid down four strategic measures 
that the Company had taken or was in the 
process of taking to meet the requirements of 
the new law, specifically: 

1.  produce and communicate a Modern 
Slavery Strategy Statement and Policy;
2.  carry out a compliance assessment of 

current suppliers;

3.  embed additional due diligence into our 

procurement activities; and

4.  review our Group-wide employment 

practices and processes, including the use 
of agencies.

Following on from the activities set out in our 
statement last year, there has been continued 
progress and activities to deliver the four 
strategic steps during the year ended 31 March 
2018 as set out below: 

1. Strategy statement and policy 
During the year ended 31 March 2018 the 
Group’s HR function, in conjunction with our 
external legal advisers, have reviewed the 
Statement and Policy and related policies 
to ensure they remain compliant and fit for 
purpose. They have also continued to oversee, 
communicate and provide training on the 
Group’s expectations and responsibilities 
of employees.

2. Assessment of current suppliers
During the year, the Group completed 
an assessment of its current suppliers by 
size and risk, and all suppliers were sent a 
letter setting out the Group’s requirements 
for their compliance with the legislation. 
Those suppliers identified as being of highest 
risk were also requested to provide details of 
their strategy and approach to compliance with 
the legislation. Responses from these suppliers 
were reviewed and a continued assessment  
of suppliers is being undertaken.

3. Procurement due diligence
This year saw the launch of the Supplier Code, 
designed to drive higher ethical standards, 
above and beyond compliance requirements 
as Wincanton have chosen to apply the 
standard to all suppliers regardless of size. 
All suppliers must comply with the Supplier 
Code in order to provide goods and services 
to the Company, and it is now a standard part 
of Wincanton’s supply contracts and terms 
of purchase (as issued on all purchase orders). 
The Supplier Code can be downloaded on the 
Group’s website. 

In addition, the Procurement function 
continues to incorporate due diligence into 
its pre-qualification process, when tendering 
and procuring new suppliers and undertaking 
renewals of all types and sizes. Supply areas 

identified as specifically high risk are continually 
assessed with suppliers asked to provide details 
of their policies to ensure compliance with 
the legislation.  

4. Employment practices
The Group’s employment practices and 
processes have been thoroughly reviewed and 
updated where necessary with the support of 
external legal advice. These updated policies 
and practices have been communicated 
and cascaded throughout the Group. 
The designated HR teams have also provided 
localised training and support to all Group 
employees. In addition, the Group HR function 
is currently working on an enhanced Code 
of Conduct that will summarise all of the 
Company’s key policies and standards with 
the intention of delivering a Group-wide roll 
out of the new Code in 2018. The Group has 
also started a project to consider the specific 
risks associated with the use of agencies and 
new standards in this area have been agreed. 
Further revisions to the Group’s employment 
policies and practices are underway and 
the work will be completed and rolled out 
throughout the Group and its network of 
agency suppliers in 2018. 

The delivery of these four strategic measures 
is a core component of the ongoing legal 
compliance of our practices and processes. 
These measures are also underpinned by the 
Group’s established processes for corporate 
governance.  The Group reviews its policies 
and process at least annually, to ensure they 
remain relevant, up-to-date and compliant 
with prevailing legislation. Moreover, all of 
our policies and procedures are designed to 
recognise and further elevate the importance 
of the highest behavioural standards and 
ethical conduct for all of our stakeholders, 
as a reflection of the Group’s values and the 
prominence of social responsibility within our 
business and our extended supply chain. 

In common with all other regulatory and legal 
requirements, as a Group, we expect and are 
prepared for the fact that the nature, root 
causes and circumstances that cause instances 
of modern slavery and human trafficking will 
change over time. The Group will continue to 
be vigilant and proactive in this area and will 
closely monitor and regularly review the four 
strategic measures and any influencing factors, 
to ensure our Group policies and practices 
remain fit for purpose and address any new 
risks that may emerge. 

The Directors approved the above statement 
on 16 May 2018. 

Raj Sharma
Company Secretary

Wincanton plc 
Registered in England and Wales No. 04178808

61

Strategic reportGovernanceDirectors’ remuneration reportDirectors’ reportIndependent auditor’s reportAccountsWincanton plc Annual Report and Accounts 2018INDEPENDENT AUDITOR’S REPORT

Independent 
auditor’s report

to the members of Wincanton plc

1. Our opinion is unmodified

We have audited the financial statements of 
Wincanton plc for the year ended 31 March 2018 
which comprise the consolidated income statement, 
consolidated statement of comprehensive income, 
consolidated and company balance sheet, 
consolidated and company statement of changes in 
equity, consolidated statement of cash flows and the 
related notes, including the accounting policies in 
note 1 to the consolidated financial statements, and 
note 1 to the parent company financial statements.

In our opinion:

— the financial statements give a true and fair view 
of the state of the Group’s and of the parent 
Company’s affairs as at 31 March 2018 and of the 
Group’s profit for the year then ended; 

— the Group financial statements have been 

properly prepared in accordance with International 
Financial Reporting Standards as adopted by the 
European Union;

— the parent Company financial statements have 
been properly prepared in accordance with UK 
Accounting Standards, including FRS 101 
Reduced Disclosure Framework; and

— the financial statements have been prepared in 

accordance with the requirements of the 
Companies Act 2006; and, as regards the Group 
financial statements, Article 4 of the IAS 
Regulation.

Basis for opinion  

We conducted our audit in accordance with 
International Standards on Auditing (UK) (“ISAs (UK)”) 
and applicable law.  Our responsibilities are described 
below.  We believe that the audit evidence we have 
obtained is a sufficient and appropriate basis for our 
opinion.  Our audit opinion is consistent with our 
report to the audit committee.  

We were appointed as auditor by the Directors in March 
2001. The period of total uninterrupted engagement is for 
the 18 financial years ended 31 March 2018.  We have 
fulfilled our ethical responsibilities under, and we remain 
independent of the Group in accordance with, UK ethical 
requirements including the FRC Ethical Standard as 
applied to listed public interest entities.  No non-audit 
services prohibited by that standard were provided.  

Overview`

Materiality: 
Group financial 
statements as a 
whole

£2.0 million (2017:£1.8 million)

4.5% of Group profit before 
taxation* (2017: 4.0% of Group 
profit before taxation)

*  Normalised to exclude exceptional items as disclosed in 
Note 3

Coverage

100% (2017:100%) of Group profit 
before tax

Risks of material misstatement                     vs 2017

Recurring risks

Group pension obligation

◄►

Revenue recognition

Recoverability of Parent 
Company’s investment in 
subsidiaries

◄►

◄►

62

Independent auditor’s reportWincanton plc Annual Report and Accounts 20182. Key audit matters: our assessment of risks of material misstatement

Key audit matters are those matters that, in our professional judgment, were of most significance in the audit of the financial 
statements and include the most significant assessed risks of material misstatement (whether or not due to fraud) identified 
by us, including those which had the greatest effect on: the overall audit strategy; the allocation of resources in the audit; and 
directing the efforts of the engagement team.  We summarise below the key audit matters, in decreasing order of audit 
significance, in arriving at our audit opinion above, together with our key audit procedures to address those matters and, as
required for public interest entities, our results from those procedures.  These matters were addressed, and our results are 
based on procedures undertaken, in the context of, and solely for the purpose of, our audit of the financial statements as a 
whole, and in forming our opinion thereon, and consequently are incidental to that opinion, and we do not provide a separate 
opinion on these matters.  

Group pension obligation

Subjective valuation

Our procedures included: 

The risk

Our response

£1,123.1 million
(2017: £1,156.7 million)

Refer to page 41 (Audit 
Committee Report), page 75 
(accounting policy) and pages 91 
to 94 (financial disclosures).

Significant estimates are made in 
valuing the Group's funded pension 
obligation (before deducting scheme 
assets) and small changes in either the 
assumptions or estimates used may 
have a significant effect on the Group’s 
net pension deficit.

— Benchmarking assumptions: challenging, 
with the support of our actuarial specialists, 
the key assumptions applied, being the 
discount rate, inflation rate and 
mortality/life expectancy, by comparison 
against externally derived data.

— Assessing transparency: considering the 
adequacy of the Group's disclosures in 
respect of the sensitivity of the obligation 
to these assumptions.

Our results:  

— We found the valuation of the pension 

obligation to be acceptable (2017 result: 
acceptable). 

Revenue recognition

2018/2019 sales

Our procedures included: 

£1,171.9 million 
(2017: £1,118.1 million)

Refer to page 76 (accounting 
policy) and pages 78 and 79 
(financial disclosures).

Wincanton issue invoices based on the 
accounting period of its customers 
which are not necessarily co-terminus 
with that of Wincanton. 

— Controls design: assessing the design and 
implementation of key controls over the 
accuracy of accrued and deferred income 
amounts. 

There is a risk that revenues could be  
recognised in the incorrect accounting 
period due to the relative complexity 
arising from the interaction of 
Wincanton’s accounting period and 
those of its customers around the year-
end. We have included this risk within 
our report due to the significant levels 
of work performed throughout the 
audit. 

— Enquiry of customers: obtaining a sample 
of customer confirmations of invoiced 
amounts and service delivery for activity 
before and after the year end as a basis for 
recalculating revenue recognition for the 
period based on customer accounting 
calendars.

— Test of details: recalculating a sample of 
accrued and deferred income amounts 
using customer confirmations and their 
respective accounting calendars. 

Our results: 

— We found the Group’s assessment of 

revenue recognition to be acceptable (2017 
result: acceptable).

63

Strategic reportGovernanceDirectors’ remuneration reportDirectors’ reportIndependent auditor’s reportAccountsWincanton plc Annual Report and Accounts 2018INDEPENDENT AUDITOR’S REPORT CONTINUED

2. Key audit matters: our assessment of risks of material misstatement (continued)

Recoverability of parent 
company’s investment in 
subsidiaries  

£108.9 million
(2017: £108.9 million)
Refer to page 102 (accounting 
policy and financial disclosures). 

The risk

Our response

Low risk, high value

Our procedures included: 

The carrying amount of the parent 
company’s investments in subsidiaries 
represents 54% (2017: 56%) of the 
company’s total assets. Their 
recoverability is not at a high risk of 
significant misstatement or subject to 
significant judgement.  However, due 
to their materiality in the context of the 
parent company financial statements, 
this is considered to be the area that 
had the greatest effect on our overall 
parent company audit.

— Tests of detail: Comparing the carrying 

amount of 100% of investments with 
the relevant subsidiaries’ balance sheet 
to identify whether their net assets, 
being an approximation of their 
minimum recoverable amount, were in 
excess of their carrying amount and 
assessing whether those subsidiaries 
have historically been profit-making.

— Assessing subsidiary audits:

Assessing the evidence obtained during 
our audit of components, as part of the 
Group audit, and considering the results 
of that work on their profits and net 
assets.

Our results:

— We found the group’s assessment of 
the recoverability of the investment in 
subsidiaries to be acceptable (2017 
result: acceptable).

We continue to perform procedures over the property provision. However, following a continued reduction in remaining lease 
periods and the number of properties affected, we have not assessed this as one of the most significant risks in our current 
year audit and, therefore, it is not separately identified in our report this year. 

64

Independent auditor’s reportWincanton plc Annual Report and Accounts 20182. Key audit matters: our assessment of risks of material misstatement (continued)

3. Our application of materiality and an 
overview of the scope of our audit

The risk

Group profit before taxation*
£44.1m (2017: £45.4m)

Our response

Group materiality
£2.0m (2017: £1.8m)

Low risk, high value

The materiality for the Group financial statements 
Recoverability of parent 
as a whole was set at £2.0 million (2017: £1.8 
company’s investment in 
million) determined with reference to a 
subsidiaries  
benchmark of Group profit before taxation, 
normalised in 2018 to exclude one-off exceptional 
£108.9 million
items as disclosed in note 3 to the financial 
(2017: £108.9 million)
statements, of which it represents 4.5% (2017: 
Refer to page 102 (accounting 
4.0% of group profit before taxation). 
policy and financial disclosures). 
Materiality for the parent company financial 
statements as a whole was set at £1.0 million 
(2017: £1.0 million) by reference to component 
materiality. This is lower than the materiality we 
would otherwise have determined by reference 
to total assets, and represents 0.5% of the 
Company's total assets (2017: 0.5%). 

The carrying amount of the parent 
company’s investments in subsidiaries 
represents 54% (2017: 56%) of the 
company’s total assets. Their 
recoverability is not at a high risk of 
significant misstatement or subject to 
significant judgement.  However, due 
to their materiality in the context of the 
parent company financial statements, 
this is considered to be the area that 
had the greatest effect on our overall 
parent company audit.

We agreed to report to the Audit Committee any 
corrected or uncorrected identified 
misstatements exceeding £0.1 million (2017: £0.1 
million), in addition to other identified 
misstatements that warranted reporting on 
qualitative grounds. 

Normalised Group PBT

Group materiality

*normalised to exclude one-off 
exceptional items of £6.2 million 
(2017: nil)

Our results:

Our procedures included: 

— Tests of detail: Comparing the carrying 

£2.0 million
Whole financial
statements materiality
(2017: £1.8m)
amount of 100% of investments with 
the relevant subsidiaries’ balance sheet 
£1.0 million
to identify whether their net assets, 
Component materiality
being an approximation of their 
(2017: £1.0 million)
minimum recoverable amount, were in 
excess of their carrying amount and 
assessing whether those subsidiaries 
have historically been profit-making.

— Assessing subsidiary audits:

Assessing the evidence obtained during 
£0.1 million
our audit of components, as part of the 
Identified misstatements
Group audit, and considering the results 
reported to the audit 
of that work on their profits and net 
committee (2017: £0.1m)
assets.

With the exception of the Guernsey component 
(Risk Underwriting (Guernsey) Limited), the Group 
team performed the audit of the Group as if it 
was a single aggregated set of financial 
information using the materiality level set out 
We continue to perform procedures over the property provision. However, following a continued reduction in remaining lease 
above. The audit of the parent company was 
periods and the number of properties affected, we have not assessed this as one of the most significant risks in our current 
conducted by the Group team. 
year audit and, therefore, it is not separately identified in our report this year. 

Group profit before tax

Group revenue

— We found the group’s assessment of 
the recoverability of the investment in 
subsidiaries to be acceptable (2017 
result: acceptable).

100%

(2017 100%)

100%

(2017 100%)

The Group team instructed the component 
auditor as to the significant areas to be covered, 
including the relevant risks detailed above and the 
information to be reported back. The Group team 
approved the component materiality of £1.0 
million (2017: £1.0 million) having regard to the 
mix of size and risk profile of the Group. 

Overall, the audit of the Group covered 100% 
(2017: 100%) of total Group revenue, Group profit 
before tax, and total Group assets. 

Telephone conference meetings were held with 
the component auditor. At these meetings, the 
findings reported to the Group team were 
discussed in more detail, and any further work 
required by the Group team was then performed 
by the component auditor. 

Group total assets 

Group profit before 
exceptional items and tax

100%

(2017 100%)

100%

(2017 100%)

Key: 

Full scope for group audit purposes 2018

Full scope for group audit purposes 2017

65

Strategic reportGovernanceDirectors’ remuneration reportDirectors’ reportIndependent auditor’s reportAccountsWincanton plc Annual Report and Accounts 2018INDEPENDENT AUDITOR’S REPORT CONTINUED

4. We have nothing to report on going concern  

Disclosures of principal risks and longer-term viability 

We are required to report to you if:

— we have anything material to add or draw attention to 
in relation to the Directors’ statement in Note 1 to the 
financial statements on the use of the going concern 
basis of accounting with no material uncertainties that 
may cast significant doubt over the Group and 
Company’s use of that basis for a period of at least 
twelve months from the date of approval of the 
financial statements; or  

— if the related statement under the Listing Rules set out 
on page 59 is materially inconsistent with our audit 
knowledge.  

We have nothing to report in these respects. 

5. We have nothing to report on the other information 

in the Annual Report 

The Directors are responsible for the other information 
presented in the Annual Report together with the financial 
statements.  Our opinion on the financial statements does 
not cover the other information and, accordingly, we do not 
express an audit opinion or, except as explicitly stated 
below, any form of assurance conclusion thereon.  

Our responsibility is to read the other information and, in 
doing so, consider whether, based on our financial 
statements audit work, the information therein is materially 
misstated or inconsistent with the financial statements or 
our audit knowledge.  Based solely on that work we have 
not identified material misstatements in the other 
information.

Strategic report and Directors’ report 

Based solely on our work on the other information:  

— we have not identified material misstatements in the 

Strategic report and the Directors’ report;  

— in our opinion the information given in those reports for 

the financial year is consistent with the financial 
statements; and  

— in our opinion those reports have been prepared in 

accordance with the Companies Act 2006.  

Directors’ remuneration report  

In our opinion the part of the Directors’ Remuneration 
Report  to be audited has been properly prepared in 
accordance with the Companies Act 2006.  

Based on the knowledge we acquired during our financial 
statements audit, we have nothing material to add or draw 
attention to in relation to:  

— the Directors’ confirmation within the Viability Statement 

on page 29 that they have carried out a robust 
assessment of the principal risks facing the Group, 
including those that would threaten its business model, 
future performance, solvency and liquidity; 

— the Principal Risks disclosures describing these risks and 
explaining how they are being managed and mitigated; 
and  

— the Directors’ explanation in the Viability Statement of 
how they have assessed the prospects of the Group, 
over what period they have done so and why they 
considered that period to be appropriate, and their 
statement as to whether they have a reasonable 
expectation that the Group will be able to continue in 
operation and meet its liabilities as they fall due over the 
period of their assessment, including any related 
disclosures drawing attention to any necessary 
qualifications or assumptions.  

Under the Listing Rules we are required to review the 
Viability Statement.  We have nothing to report in this 
respect.  

Corporate governance disclosures  

We are required to report to you if:

— we have identified material inconsistencies between the 
knowledge we acquired during our financial statements 
audit and the Directors’ statement that they consider 
that the annual report and financial statements taken as 
a whole is fair, balanced and understandable and 
provides the information necessary for shareholders to 
assess the Group’s position and performance, business 
model and strategy; or  

— the section of the annual report describing the work of 
the Audit Committee does not appropriately address 
matters communicated by us to the Audit Committee.

We are required to report to you if the Corporate 
Governance Statement does not properly disclose a 
departure from the eleven provisions of the UK Corporate 
Governance Code specified by the Listing Rules for our 
review.  

We have nothing to report in these respects.  

66

Independent auditor’s reportWincanton plc Annual Report and Accounts 20186. We have nothing to report on the other matters on 

which we are required to report by exception 

Under the Companies Act 2006, we are required to report 
to you if, in our opinion:  

— adequate accounting records have not been kept by the 
parent Company, or returns adequate for our audit have 
not been received from branches not visited by us; or  

— the parent Company financial statements and the part 

of the Directors’ Remuneration Report to be audited 
are not in agreement with the accounting records and 
returns; or  

— certain disclosures of Directors’ remuneration specified 

by law are not made; or  

— we have not received all the information and 
explanations we require for our audit.  

We have nothing to report in these respects. 

7. Respective responsibilities  

Directors’ responsibilities  

As explained more fully in their statement set out on pages 
60 and 61, the Directors are responsible for: the preparation 
of the financial statements including being satisfied that 
they give a true and fair view; such internal control as they 
determine is necessary to enable the preparation of 
financial statements that are free from material 
misstatement, whether due to fraud or error; assessing the 
Group and parent Company’s ability to continue as a going 
concern, disclosing, as applicable, matters related to going 
concern; and using the going concern basis of accounting 
unless they either intend to liquidate the Group or the 
parent Company or to cease operations, or have no realistic 
alternative but to do so. 

Auditor’s responsibilities  

Our objectives are to obtain reasonable assurance about 
whether the financial statements as a whole are free from 
material misstatement, whether due to fraud or other 
irregularities (see below), or error, and to issue our opinion 
in an auditor’s report.  Reasonable assurance is a high level 
of assurance, but does not guarantee that an audit 
conducted in accordance with ISAs (UK) will always detect 
a material misstatement when it exists.  Misstatements can 
arise from fraud, other irregularities or error and are 
considered material if, individually or in aggregate, they 
could reasonably be expected to influence the economic 
decisions of users taken on the basis of the financial  
statements.

A fuller description of our responsibilities is provided on the 
FRC’s website at www.frc.org.uk/auditorsresponsibilities. 

Irregularities – ability to detect

We identified areas of laws and regulations that could 
reasonably be expected to have a material effect on the 
financial statements from our sector experience, through 
discussion with the Directors and other management (as 
required by auditing standards). 

We had regard to laws and regulations in areas that directly 
affect the financial statements including financial reporting 
(including related company legislation) and taxation 
legislation.  We considered the extent of compliance with 
those laws and regulations as part of our procedures on the 
related financial statement items. 

In addition we considered the impact of laws and 
regulations in the specific area of health and safety, 
recognising the nature of the Group’s activities.  With the 
exception of any known or possible non-compliance, and as 
required by auditing standards, our work in respect of this 
was limited to enquiry of the Directors and other 
management and inspection of regulatory and legal 
correspondence. We considered the effect of any known or 
possible non-compliance in these areas as part of our 
procedures on the related financial statement items.

We communicated identified laws and regulations 
throughout our team and remained alert to any indications 
of non-compliance throughout the audit.  This included 
communication from the group to the component audit 
team of relevant laws and regulations identified at group 
level, with a request to report on any indications of potential 
existence of non-compliance with relevant laws and 
regulations (irregularities) in these areas, or other areas 
directly identified by the component team.

As with any audit, there remained a higher risk of non-
detection of irregularities, as these may involve collusion, 
forgery, intentional omissions, misrepresentations, or the 
override of internal controls.

8.  The purpose of our audit work and to whom we owe 

our responsibilities 

This report is made solely to the Company’s members, as a 
body, in accordance with Chapter 3 of Part 16 of the 
Companies Act 2006.  Our audit work has been undertaken 
so that we might state to the Company’s members those 
matters we are required to state to them in an auditor’s 
report and for no other purpose.  To the fullest extent 
permitted by law, we do not accept or assume 
responsibility to anyone other than the Company and the 
Company’s members, as a body, for our audit work, for this 
report, or for the opinions we have formed. 

Simon Haydn-Jones (Senior Statutory Auditor)

for and on behalf of KPMG LLP, Statutory Auditor 
Chartered Accountants
66 Queen Square
Bristol
BS1 4BE

16 May 2018

67

Strategic reportGovernanceDirectors’ remuneration reportDirectors’ reportIndependent auditor’s reportAccountsWincanton plc Annual Report and Accounts 2018Accounts
FOR THE YEAR ENDED 31 MARCH 2018

CONSOLIDATED INCOME STATEMENT

Revenue 
Underlying operating profit 
Amortisation of acquired intangibles
Exceptional items
Operating profit
Financing income
Financing cost
Net financing costs
Profit before tax
Income tax expense
Profit attributable to equity shareholders of Wincanton plc

Earnings per share
– basic
– diluted

Note 
2
2
9
3
3
5
5
5

6

7
7

2018 
£m 
1,171.9
52.9
(2.3)
(6.2)
44.4
–
(6.5)
(6.5)
37.9
(6.7)
31.2

2017 
£m
1,118.1
52.1
(2.2)
6.1
56.0
0.1
(10.7)
(10.6)
45.4
(3.4)
42.0

25.2p
24.8p

34.2p
33.0p

68

Wincanton plc Annual Report and Accounts 2018 
Accounts
FOR THE YEAR ENDED 31 MARCH 2018

CONSOLIDATED STATEMENT OF COMPREHENSIVE INCOME

Profit for the year
Other comprehensive income/(expense)
Items which will not subsequently be reclassified to the income statement
Remeasurements of defined benefit liability
Income tax relating to items that will not subsequently be reclassified to profit or loss

Items which are or may subsequently be reclassified to the income statement
Net foreign exchange loss on investment in foreign subsidiaries net of hedged items
Effective portion of changes in fair value of cash flow hedges 
Net change in fair value of cash flow hedges transferred to the income statement

Other comprehensive income for the year, net of income tax 
Total comprehensive income attributable to equity shareholders of Wincanton plc

Note

24
6

5

2018 
£m
31.2

13.8
(2.4)
11.4

–
(0.1)
0.1
–
11.4
42.6

2017 
£m
42.0

17.6
(4.0)
13.6

(0.1)
0.4
0.2
0.5
14.1
56.1

69

Strategic reportGovernanceDirectors’ remuneration reportDirectors’ reportIndependent auditor’s reportAccountsWincanton plc Annual Report and Accounts 2018Accounts
AT 31 MARCH 2018

CONSOLIDATED BALANCE SHEET

Non-current assets
Goodwill and intangible assets
Property, plant and equipment
Investments, including those equity accounted
Deferred tax assets

Current assets
Inventories
Trade and other receivables
Assets classified as held for sale
Cash and cash equivalents

Current liabilities
Income tax payable
Borrowings and other financial liabilities
Trade and other payables
Employee benefits
Provisions

Net current liabilities
Total assets less current liabilities
Non-current liabilities
Borrowings and other financial liabilities 
Employee benefits
Provisions

Net liabilities

Equity
Issued share capital
Share premium
Merger reserve
Hedging reserve
Translation reserve
Retained earnings
Total equity deficit

Note

2018  
£m

2017  
£m

9
10
12
13

14
15
16
17

18
19
24
20

18
24
20

82.7
41.7
0.1
11.5
136.0

4.4
140.7
6.1
17.6
168.8

(5.7)
–
(264.1)
–
(17.8)
(287.6)
(118.8)
17.2

(47.1)
(49.5)
(33.1)
(129.7)
(112.5)

12.5
12.9
3.5
(0.1)
(0.3)
(141.0)
(112.5)

86.9
43.7
0.1
17.2
147.9

4.0
133.4
–
40.9
178.3

(6.4)
(0.2)
(265.4)
(0.2)
(15.2)
(287.4)
(109.1)
38.8

(65.0)
(78.4)
(34.8)
(178.2)
(139.4)

12.4
12.9
3.5
(0.1)
(0.3)
(167.8)
(139.4)

These financial statements were approved by the Board of Directors on 16 May 2018 and were signed on their behalf by:

A Colman 
Chief Executive Officer 

T Lawlor
Chief Financial Officer

70

Wincanton plc Annual Report and Accounts 2018Accounts
FOR THE YEAR ENDED 31 MARCH 2018

CONSOLIDATED STATEMENT OF CHANGES IN EQUITY

Balance at 1 April 2016

Profit for the year
Other comprehensive income
Total comprehensive income
Share based payment transactions
Current tax on share based  
  payment transactions
Deferred tax on share based  
  payment transactions
Own shares acquired
Dividends paid to shareholders
Balance at 31 March 2017

Issued 
 share 
capital 
£m
12.4

–
–
–
–

–

–
–
–
12.4

–
–
–
–

–

–
–
–
12.9

Balance at 1 April 2017

12.4

12.9

Profit for the year
Other comprehensive income
Total comprehensive income

Share based payment transactions
Current tax on share based  
  payment transactions
Deferred tax on share based  
  payment transactions
Shares issued
Own shares acquired
Dividends paid to shareholders
Balance at 31 March 2018

–
–
–

–

–

–
0.1
–
–
12.5

–
–
–

–

–

–
–
–
–
12.9

–
–
–
–

–

–
–
–
3.5

3.5

–
–
–

–

–

–
–
–
–
3.5

Retained earnings

Share 
premium 
£m
12.9

Merger 
reserve 
£m
3.5

Hedging 
reserve 
£m
(0.7)

Translation 
reserve 
£m
(0.2)

Own 
 shares 
£m
(3.1)

Profit and 
loss 
£m
(209.1)

Total 
equity 
deficit 
£m
(184.3)

42.0
14.1
56.1
(1.7)

1.1

(0.1)
(0.1)
(10.4)
(139.4)

–
0.6
0.6
–

–

–
–
–
(0.1)

–
(0.1)
(0.1)
–

–

–
–
–
(0.3)

–
–
–
2.7

–

–
(0.1)
–
(0.5)

42.0
13.6
55.6
(4.4)

1.1

(0.1)
–
(10.4)
(167.3)

(0.1)

(0.3)

(0.5)

(167.3)

(139.4)

–
–
–

–

–

–
–
–
–
(0.1)

–
–
–

–

–

–
–
–
–
(0.3)

–
–
–

0.7

–

31.2
11.4
42.6

(2.8)

31.2
11.4
42.6

(2.1)

0.1

0.1

–
(0.1)
(2.1)
–
(2.0)

–
–
–
        (11.6)
(139.0)

–
–
(2.1)
(11.6)
(112.5)

71

Strategic reportGovernanceDirectors’ remuneration reportDirectors’ reportIndependent auditor’s reportAccountsWincanton plc Annual Report and Accounts 2018Accounts
FOR THE YEAR ENDED 31 MARCH 2018

CONSOLIDATED STATEMENT OF CASH FLOWS

Operating activities
Profit before tax
Adjustments for
– depreciation and amortisation 
– interest expense
– exceptional items (non cash)
– share based payments

(Increase)/decrease in trade and other receivables
(Increase)/decrease in inventories
Decrease in trade and other payables
Increase/(decrease) in provisions
(Decrease)/increase in employee benefits before pension deficit payment
Income taxes paid
Cash generated before pension deficit payment
Pension deficit payment
Cash flows from operating activities

Investing activities
Proceeds from sale of property, plant and equipment
Proceeds from sale of computer software
Interest received
Additions of property, plant and equipment
Additions of computer software
Cash flows from investing activities

Financing activities
Own shares acquired
Borrowings repaid
Increase in borrowings
Equity dividends paid
Interest paid
Cash flows from financing activities

Net (decrease)/increase in cash and cash equivalents
Cash and cash equivalents at beginning of year
Cash and cash equivalents at end of year

Represented by:
– cash at bank and in hand
– restricted cash, being deposits held by the Group’s insurance subsidiary

72

2018 
£m

37.9

14.2
6.5
–
(2.1)
56.5
(7.2)
(0.4)
(1.6)
0.2
(2.6)
(4.0)
40.9
(14.6)
26.3

0.4
0.1
–
(14.5)
–
(14.0)

(1.8)
(25.0)
6.9
(11.6)
(4.1)
(35.6)

(23.3)
40.9
17.6

11.7
5.9
17.6

2017 
£m

45.4

14.0
10.6
(4.6)
(1.7)
63.7
6.2
0.8
–
(4.3)
0.9
(2.6)
64.7
(14.1)
50.6

0.1
0.4
0.1
(18.0)
(1.2)
(18.6)

(0.1)
(20.1)
10.1
(10.4)
(6.9)
(27.4)

4.6
36.3
40.9

33.0
7.9
40.9

Wincanton plc Annual Report and Accounts 2018NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

1. ACCOUNTING POLICIES

Statement of compliance 
Wincanton plc (the Company) is a company incorporated in England and 
Wales. The Company is a public company limited by shares. The address 
of the Company’s registered office and its registered number are shown 
on page 106. The consolidated financial statements include those of the 
Company and its subsidiaries (together referred to as the Group) and the 
Group’s jointly controlled entities.

The consolidated financial statements have been prepared and 
approved by the Directors in accordance with International Financial 
Reporting Standards (IFRS) and International Financial Reporting 
Interpretations Committee (IFRIC) interpretations, as adopted by the 
International Accounting Standards Board (IASB) and by the European 
Union (EU) and with those parts of the Companies Act 2006 applicable 
to companies reporting under IFRS (Adopted IFRS).

At the date of authorisation of these financial statements, the following 
Standards and Interpretations which have not been applied in these 
financial statements were in issue but are either not yet effective or 
have not yet been adopted by the EU:

 • IFRS 9 Financial Instruments 
 • IFRS 15 Revenue from Contracts with Customers
 • IFRS 16 Leases
 • IFRS 17 Insurance Contracts
 • Amendments to IFRS 2 Classification and Measurement of Share-based 

Payment Transactions

 • Annual Improvements 2014–2016 Cycle (apart from the amendment  

to IFRS 12 effective in the current year)
 • Annual Improvements 2015–2017 Cycle

IFRS 9 Financial Instruments was issued by the IASB in July 2014 and is 
effective for the Group for the year ended 31 March 2019. Applying IFRS 
9 will result in changes to the measurement and disclosure of financial 
instruments and introduces a new expected loss impairment model. 
The Group does not currently expect adoption of the standard to have  
a significant impact on its consolidated results or financial position,  
but will result in increased disclosure.

IFRS 15 Revenue from Contracts with Customers was issued by the IASB 
in May 2014 and becomes effective for the Group for the year ended 
31 March 2019. Under IFRS 15 revenue is recognised when the customer 
obtains control of the goods and services transferred by the Group and 
the related performance obligations have been satisfied. The amount 
recognised reflects the amount of consideration that the Group expects 
to be entitled to in exchange for those goods and services.

Whilst the Group project is still ongoing, the anticipated effects of IFRS 15 
include changes in the timing of revenue recognition for: costs to fulfil a 
contract; deferred management fees; and revenue linked to performance 
measures such as Key Performance Indicators and gain-share 
mechanisms. The Group currently estimates the adjustment to equity 
at 1 April 2018 to be minimal, with capitalisation of costs of fulfilling a 
contract expected to offset a reduction in accrued income. For the year 
ending 31 March 2019, an adjustment to revenue of less than £0.5m is 
anticipated with minimal operating profit impact. Actual amounts in  
the 31 March 2019 financial statements may differ, owing to changes  
in contracts held or different economic conditions.

The Group will be required to present separate line items for contract 
assets and contract liabilities and to disclose further details on significant 
changes in these balances, as well as judgements made in determining 
which costs of fulfilling a contract can be capitalised.

IFRS 16 Leases was issued by the IASB in January 2016 and becomes 
effective for the Group for the year ended 31 March 2020. Adoption  
of this standard will result in the recognition on balance sheet of assets 
and liabilities relating to leases which are currently being accounted 
for as operating leases. The Group continues to assess the impact of 
adopting IFRS 16, with a significant impact anticipated on the reported 
assets, liabilities, and income statement of the Group, as well as extensive 
additional disclosures.

Other than as mentioned above, the Group does not currently expect 
that adoption of the other standards and amendments listed will have 
a significant effect on the consolidated results or financial position of 
the Group.

The Company has elected to prepare its financial statements in 
accordance with Financial Reporting Standard 101 Reduced Disclosure 
Framework (FRS 101); these are shown on pages 100 to 103 and present 
information about the Company as a separate entity.

Basis of preparation
The Group and Company financial statements are presented in pounds 
sterling, rounded to the nearest hundred thousand. They are prepared 
on the historical cost basis except where assets or liabilities are required 
to be stated at their fair value.

The accounting policies set out below have been applied consistently 
to all periods presented in these Group financial statements with 
the exception of amendments resulting from IFRS 11 Accounting 
for Acquisitions of Interests in Joint Operations, IAS 16 and IAS 38 
Clarification of Acceptable Methods of Depreciation and Amortisation, 
IAS 1 Disclosure Initiative and Annual Improvements 2012-2014 Cycle. 
The adoption of these amendments has not had an effect on the 
consolidated results or financial position of the Group.

Critical accounting judgements and key sources of estimation 
uncertainty
The preparation of Group financial statements under Adopted IFRS 
and parent Company financial statements under FRS 101 requires 
management to make judgements, estimates and assumptions that 
affect the application of policies and the reported amounts of assets 
and liabilities, income and expenses. The estimates and associated 
assumptions are based on historical experience and various other factors 
that are believed to be reasonable under the circumstances, the results 
of which form the basis of making the judgements about carrying values 
of assets and liabilities that are not readily apparent from other sources. 
Actual results may differ from these estimates.

The estimates and assumptions are reviewed on an ongoing basis. 
Revisions to accounting estimates are recognised in the period in which 
the estimate is revised and/or in future periods if applicable. 

Management discusses with the Audit Committee the development, 
selection, application and disclosure of the Group’s critical accounting 
policies and estimates.

Critical judgements in applying the Group’s accounting policies

The following are critical judgements that the Directors have made 
in the process of applying the Group’s accounting policies and that 
have the most significant effect on the amounts recognised in the 
financial statements.

Defined benefit pension arrangements
Details of the Group’s defined benefit arrangements are set out in 
Note 24 to the financial statements, including the assumptions made, 
risk factors and tables showing the sensitivity of the pension scheme 
obligations to changes in actuarial assumptions. The effects of changes 
in the actuarial and demographic assumptions underlying the Scheme’s 
obligations, together with experience gains or losses and the return on 
assets excluding amounts recognised in net financing costs are classified 
as remeasurements in the defined benefit liability.

73

Strategic reportGovernanceDirectors’ remuneration reportDirectors’ reportIndependent auditor’s reportAccountsAccountsWincanton plc Annual Report and Accounts 2018NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS CONTINUED

1. ACCOUNTING POLICIES (CONTINUED)

Provisions
Provisions are liabilities of uncertain timing or amount and therefore 
judgement is applied in making a reliable estimate of the quantum and 
timing. Further information about the assumptions and risk factors is 
given in Note 20.

Key sources of estimation uncertainty
The Group does not have any other key assumptions concerning the 
future, or other key sources of estimation uncertainty in the reporting 
period that may have a significant risk of causing a material adjustment 
to the carrying amounts of assets and liabilities within the next 
financial year.

Going concern
The Group has net liabilities of £112.5m (2017: £139.4m) primarily as 
a result of the pension deficit, as well as previous retained losses. 
The reduction in the year principally relates to the profit for the year and 
reduced pension deficit offset by dividend payments. 

The Group’s business activities, together with the factors likely to affect 
its future development, performance and position are set out on pages 
11 to 15 and 24 to 27 which also contain a review of the financial position 
of the Group, its cash flows, liquidity position and borrowing facilities. 
In addition, Note 26 to the financial statements includes the Group’s 
objectives, policies and processes for managing: its capital; its financial 
risk management objectives; details of its financial instruments and 
hedging activities; and its exposures to credit risk and liquidity risk.

The Group’s committed facilities at 31 March 2018 comprise the 
syndicated main bank facility of £141.2m which amortises by £8.8m 
in October 2019, with a second equal amortisation at the four year 
anniversary in October 2020 before maturing in October 2021. A £25m 
facility with Prudential/M&G UK Companies Financing Fund LP was 
prepaid without penalty on 14 July 2017 from cash generated in the 
period and from other facilities.

As part of the year end process the Directors have undertaken a 
going concern review, as required by IAS 1 Presentation of Financial 
Statements. This includes a review of the headroom available when 
the Group’s facilities are compared to the forecast monthly cash flows 
for the forthcoming financial year, sensitising the borrowing covenants 
to give an indication of the headroom therein, and consideration of 
the assessment undertaken for the purposes of providing the Viability 
statement on page 29. Having undertaken this review the Directors have 
a reasonable expectation that the Company and the Group overall have 
adequate resources to continue to meet their obligations as they fall due 
and satisfy their borrowing covenants for at least the next twelve months 
and for the foreseeable future. Accordingly these financial statements 
have been prepared on a going concern basis.

Basis of consolidation
The consolidated Group financial statements include the financial 
statements of the Company and its subsidiary undertakings made up 
to the balance sheet date. When the Company acquired the Wincanton 
group of companies upon demerger from the former parent in May 
2001, the changes in Group structure were accounted for using the 
principles of merger accounting available under UK GAAP at the time. 
Businesses acquired or disposed of since then have been accounted 
for using acquisition accounting principles from or up to the date that 
control passed.

Subsidiaries are those entities controlled by the Group. Control is 
achieved when the Company has power over the investee; is exposed 
to, or has rights to, variable return from its involvement with the 
investee; and has the ability to use its power to affect its returns. 
The Company reassesses whether or not it controls an investee if facts 
and circumstances indicate that there are changes to one or more 
of the three elements of control listed above. In assessing control, 
potential voting rights that presently are exercisable or convertible 

74

are taken into account. The financial statements of subsidiaries are 
included in the consolidated financial statements from or up to the  
date that control passed.

The results, assets and liabilities of jointly controlled entities are 
incorporated in these financial statements using the equity method 
of accounting, in accordance with IFRS 11 Joint Arrangements and 
IAS 28 Investments in Associates and Joint Ventures. Under the 
equity method, a jointly controlled entity is initially recognised in the 
consolidated statement of financial position at cost and adjusted 
thereafter to recognise the Group’s share of the profit or loss and other 
comprehensive income of the jointly controlled entity. Intra-group 
balances, and any unrealised gains and losses or income and expenses 
arising from intra-group transactions, are eliminated in preparing 
the consolidated financial statements. Unrealised gains arising from 
transactions with jointly controlled entities are eliminated to the extent  
of the Group’s interest in the entity. Unrealised losses are eliminated  
in the same way as unrealised gains, but only to the extent that there  
is no evidence of impairment.

Intangible assets
Goodwill 
All business combinations are accounted for by applying the acquisition 
method. Goodwill represents amounts arising on acquisition of 
subsidiaries and jointly controlled entities. 

Goodwill is stated at cost less any impairment losses. Goodwill is 
allocated to cash-generating units and is tested annually for impairment.

Other intangible assets
Intangible assets arising under a business combination (acquired 
intangible assets) are capitalised at fair value as determined at the date of 
acquisition and are stated at that fair value less accumulated amortisation 
and impairment losses.

Amortisation is charged to the income statement on a straight-line basis 
over the estimated useful lives of acquired intangible assets from the 
date they are acquired as follows:

Customer relationships

6 to 10 years

The cost of computer software purchased or developed in-house which 
has the capacity to generate economic benefits for a period in excess 
of one year is capitalised as an intangible asset. Amortisation is charged 
to the income statement on a straight-line basis over the following 
estimated useful lives:

Computer software costs

3 to 5 years

Major software projects, such as the Group back office project, may be 
amortised over lives of up to ten years.

Property, plant and equipment
Items of property, plant and equipment are stated at cost or deemed 
cost less accumulated depreciation and impairment losses. The cost of 
tangible assets includes directly attributable costs, including appropriate 
commissioning costs. The cost of financing the construction of major 
properties is included in their capitalised cost. The interest rate applied 
represents the actual finance costs incurred on the funds borrowed 
specifically to construct the asset.

Subsequent expenditure
The Group recognises in the carrying amount of an item of property, 
plant and equipment the costs incurred in replacing part of such an 
item if it is probable that the future economic benefits will flow to the 
Group and when the cost can be measured reliably. All other such 
costs, including the derecognition of the replaced part of the item, 
are expensed in the income statement as incurred.

AccountsWincanton plc Annual Report and Accounts 20181. ACCOUNTING POLICIES (CONTINUED)

Depreciation
Depreciation is charged to the income statement on a straight-line basis 
over the estimated useful life of each part of an item of property, plant 
and equipment. The estimated useful lives are as follows:

Freehold and long leasehold buildings
Short leasehold improvements
Plant and equipment, furniture and fittings
Office machinery and computers
Motor vehicles

50 years
life of lease
5 to 25 years
3 to 5 years 
5 to 10 years

The range of useful economic lives given reflects the fact that assets held 
for specific contracts are depreciated over the lives of those contracts. 
Freehold land is not depreciated. The residual value of tangible assets, 
if significant, is reassessed annually.

Assets held for sale
Non-current assets are classified as held for sale if their carrying amount 
will be recovered through a sale transaction rather than through 
continuing use. This condition is met only when: the sale is highly 
probable; the asset is available for immediate sale in its present condition; 
and management are committed to the sale which is expected to 
complete within one year from the date of classification. Assets held for 
sale are measured at the lower of carrying amount and fair value less 
costs to sell.

Inventories
Inventories are stated at the lower of cost and net realisable value. Cost is 
based on the first-in first-out principle and includes expenditure incurred 
in acquiring the inventories and bringing them to their existing location 
and condition. Net realisable value is the estimated selling price in the 
ordinary course of business, less selling expenses.

Trade and other receivables
Trade and other receivables are stated at their fair value on initial 
recognition (discounted if material) and subsequently at amortised cost, 
ie less any impairment losses.

Cash and cash equivalents
Cash and cash equivalents comprise cash balances, restricted cash and 
call deposits. 

Trade and other payables
Trade and other payables are stated at their fair value on initial 
recognition (discounted if material) and subsequently at amortised cost.

Foreign currency
Transactions in foreign currencies are translated at the foreign exchange 
rate ruling at the date of the transaction. Monetary assets and liabilities 
denominated in foreign currencies at the balance sheet date are 
translated into sterling at the foreign exchange rate ruling at that date. 
Foreign exchange differences arising on such translation are recognised 
in the income statement. 

The assets and liabilities of foreign operations, including goodwill and fair 
value adjustments arising on consolidation, are translated into sterling at 
the foreign exchange rates ruling at the balance sheet date. The revenues 
and expenses of foreign operations are translated into sterling at rates 
approximating the foreign exchange rates ruling at the dates of the 
transactions. Foreign exchange differences arising on translation are 
recognised directly in a separate component of other comprehensive 
income. They are released into the income statement upon disposal.

Employee benefits 
The Group operates both defined contribution and defined benefit 
pension arrangements. The assets of these arrangements are held 

in separate Trustee administered funds independent of the Group. 
The investment strategy of the Trustee and Group is to maximise 
investment returns, with a key area for management attention being 
to seek to meet the Group’s funded defined benefit obligations. 
In accordance with this strategy certain investments are designated at 
fair value and are accounted for as set out below. The defined benefit 
arrangements closed to future accrual with effect from 31 March 2014.

Defined contribution arrangements 
Obligations for contributions to defined contribution pension 
arrangements are recognised as an expense in the income statement 
as incurred.

Defined benefit arrangements 
The Group’s net obligation in respect of defined benefit pension 
arrangements is calculated separately for each plan by estimating the 
amount of future benefit that employees have earned in return for 
their service in prior periods; that benefit is discounted to determine 
the present value, and the fair value of any scheme assets is deducted. 
The discount rate is the yield at the balance sheet date on AA credit rated 
bonds that have maturity dates approximating the terms of the Group’s 
obligations. The calculation is performed by a qualified actuary using the 
projected unit method.

Where the calculation results in an asset to the Group, this is limited to 
the present value of any future refunds from the scheme or reductions 
in future contributions to the scheme.

Past service costs arising due to plan amendments or curtailments 
are recognised in the income statement immediately.

Remeasurement gains and losses that arise in calculating the Group’s 
obligation in respect of a scheme are recognised in full through other 
comprehensive income in the statement of comprehensive income.

Share based payment transactions
The Group has applied the requirements of IFRS 2 Share based Payments 
to the grants of options made under the Special Option Plan and Long 
Term Incentive Plan. 

The Group issues options under equity-settled share based incentive 
schemes to certain employees which are measured at the date of grant 
as the fair value of the employee services required in exchange for the 
grant. The fair value determined is expensed on a straight-line basis 
over the vesting period, based on the Group’s estimate of shares that 
will eventually vest and adjusted for the effect of non-market based 
vesting conditions.

Fair value is measured by an external valuer using the Binomial, 
Monte-Carlo or scenario-modelling methods as appropriate. 
The expected life assumptions used in the models have been adjusted, 
based on management’s best estimate, for the effects of non-
transferability, exercise restrictions and behavioural considerations.

A number of shares in the Company are held in trust on behalf of 
employees who hold options under the Group’s equity-settled share 
based incentive schemes. Such shares are held by an employee benefit 
trust and are treated as treasury shares and shown in the balance sheet 
as a deduction from equity. 

Other share schemes
Shares awarded on a matching basis to employees participating in 
the Company’s Share Incentive Plan are purchased at the prevailing 
market rate and charged to the income statement each period as 
employees make an eligible contribution. The shares purchased are 
held in a separately administered offshore trust for the benefit of the 
Plan participants.

75

Strategic reportGovernanceDirectors’ remuneration reportDirectors’ reportIndependent auditor’s reportAccountsWincanton plc Annual Report and Accounts 2018NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS CONTINUED

1. ACCOUNTING POLICIES (CONTINUED)

Provisions
A provision is recognised in the balance sheet when the Group has a 
present legal or constructive obligation as a result of a past event and 
it is probable that an outflow of economic benefits will be required to 
settle the obligation. If the effect is material, provisions are determined 
by discounting the expected future cash flows.

The Group provides for onerous property provisions on a site by site 
basis due to the unique nature and location of each site. Provision is 
made for the best estimate of the expected cost of empty and under-
utilised properties, including dilapidations where applicable. 
Dilapidations are provided for specific individual properties where the 
outflow of resources is probable and the amount of the obligation can 
be reliably estimated. Where significant, amounts are discounted.

The Group provides for insurance claims on an appropriate discounted 
basis depending on the expected timing of their settlement. Provision  
is made for the estimated costs of claims arising from past events based 
on the advice of the Group’s external insurance advisers.

Other provisions include those for restructuring, onerous contracts, 
sundry claims and settlements. A restructuring provision is recognised 
only when a constructive obligation exists, with the amount recognised 
based on the estimated liability. An onerous contract provision is 
recognised when the unavoidable costs of meeting the obligations 
under the contract exceed the economic benefits expected to be 
received. Unavoidable costs are only those costs that are incremental in 
fulfilling the contract and exclude depreciation and central recharges.

Impairment
The carrying amounts of the Group’s assets, other than inventories 
and deferred tax assets, are reviewed at each balance sheet date to 
determine whether there is any indication of impairment. The two 
exceptions are dealt with as per the separate applicable accounting 
policy. An asset is considered for impairment testing if objective evidence 
indicates that one or more events had a negative effect on the estimated 
future cash flows of the asset. If any such indication exists the asset’s 
recoverable amount is estimated. For trade receivables specific bad 
debts are provided against unless the Group is satisfied that no recovery 
of the amount owing is possible; at that point the amount considered 
irrecoverable is written off.

A cash-generating unit is the smallest identifiable group of assets that 
generates cash inflows that are largely independent of the cash inflows 
from other assets or groups of assets. An impairment loss is recognised 
whenever the carrying amount of an asset or cash-generating unit 
exceeds its recoverable amount. Impairment losses are recognised 
in the income statement. Impairment losses recognised in respect 
of cash-generating units are allocated first to reduce the amount of 
goodwill allocated to the applicable cash-generating unit and then 
to reduce the carrying amount of the other assets in the unit on a 
pro rata basis. 

Calculation of recoverable amount
The recoverable amount of the Group’s receivables carried at amortised 
cost is calculated as the present value of expected future cash flows, 
discounted at the original effective interest rate inherent in the asset. 
Receivables with a short duration are not discounted.

The recoverable amount of other assets is the greater of their fair value 
less costs to sell and value in use. In assessing value in use, the estimated 
future cash flows are discounted to their present value. For an asset that 
does not generate largely independent cash inflows, the recoverable 
amount is determined for the cash generating unit to which the 
asset belongs.

Reversals of impairment
An impairment loss in respect of goodwill is not reversed. An impairment 
loss in respect of a receivable carried at amortised cost is reversed only 

76

to the extent that the carrying amount does not exceed the carrying 
amount that would have been determined if no impairment loss had 
been recognised and if the reversal can be related objectively to an event 
occurring after the impairment was recognised.

In respect of other assets, an impairment loss is reversed if there has been 
a change in the estimates used to determine the recoverable amount. 

Revenue recognition
Revenue from services rendered is recognised in the income statement 
on the delivery of those services based on the proportion of the total 
delivered that can be reliably measured at the balance sheet date. 
Where payments are received in advance of revenue being recognised 
they are included as deferred income. Where revenue is recognised 
in advance of amounts being invoiced, including recoverable costs 
of fulfilling a contract, it is reported as accrued income. Where a 
contract contains elements of variable consideration, the Group will 
estimate the amount of variable consideration to which it will be 
entitled under the contract. Variable consideration can arise as a result 
of incentives, performance bonuses, penalties or other similar items. 
Variable consideration, including revenue linked to performance such as 
Key Performance Indicators and gain-share mechanisms, is recognised 
only to the extent that it is highly probable that the economic benefit 
will transfer to the Group. Deferred management fees are recognised 
over the contract term if the transfer of economic benefits to the Group 
is highly probable.

Expenses
Lease payments
Payments made under operating leases are recognised in the 
income statement on a straight-line basis over the term of the lease. 
Lease incentives received are recognised in the income statement 
as an integral part of the total lease expense.

Net financing costs
Net financing costs comprise interest payable and other charges 
less interest income.

Interest payable on borrowings is calculated using the effective interest 
rate method. Other charges include bank fees, amortisation of bank 
arrangement fees, unwinding of discounts, and losses on hedging 
instruments that are recognised in the income statement (see hedge 
accounting policy below). 

Interest income includes interest receivable on funds invested and 
gains on hedging instruments, and these are recognised in the income 
statement as they accrue.

Net financing costs include the interest on the net defined benefit 
pension liability.

Taxation
Tax on profits or losses for the year comprises current and deferred tax 
and is recognised in the income statement except to the extent that it 
relates to items recognised in other comprehensive income or directly 
in equity, in which case it is recognised in the relevant component.

Current tax is the expected tax payable on the taxable income for 
the year, using tax rates enacted or substantively enacted at the 
balance sheet date, and any adjustment to tax payable in respect 
of previous years.

Deferred tax is provided using the balance sheet liability method, 
providing for temporary differences between the carrying amounts 
of assets and liabilities for financial reporting purposes and the amounts 
used for taxation purposes. The following temporary differences are not 
provided for: the initial recognition of goodwill and the initial recognition 
of assets or liabilities that affect neither accounting nor taxable profit. 
The amount of deferred tax provided is based on the expected manner 
of realisation or settlement of the carrying amount of assets and 
liabilities, using tax rates enacted or substantively enacted at the balance 
sheet date.

AccountsWincanton plc Annual Report and Accounts 2018When a hedging instrument expires or is sold, terminated or exercised, or 
the entity revokes designation of the hedge relationship but the hedged 
forecast transaction is still expected to occur, the cumulative gain or 
loss at that point remains in equity and is recognised in accordance 
with the above policy when the transaction takes place. If the hedged 
transaction is no longer expected to take place, the cumulative gain 
or loss is removed from equity and recognised immediately in the 
income statement.

Hedge of monetary assets and liabilities
Where a derivative financial instrument is used to economically hedge 
the foreign exchange exposure of a recognised monetary asset or 
liability, no hedge accounting is applied and any gain or loss on the 
hedging instrument is recognised in the income statement.

Interest-bearing borrowings
Interest-bearing borrowings are recognised initially at fair value, 
less attributable transaction costs. Subsequent to initial recognition, 
interest-bearing borrowings are stated at amortised cost with any 
difference between cost and redemption value being recognised 
in the income statement over the period of the borrowings on 
an effective interest basis. Interest-bearing borrowings which are 
designated hedged items in a fair value hedge arrangement are 
carried at fair value (see policy above).

Dividends 
Dividends are recognised in the period in which they are declared  
and approved, or paid.

Exceptional items 
Exceptional items are those items of income or expenditure which, 
due to their nature or size, the Directors consider should be disclosed 
separately on the face of the income statement. The Directors present 
the results of the business on an underlying basis, as they believe this 
better represents the performance of the business.

Alternative Performance Measures (APMs)
Underlying results are used in the day-to-day management of the Group. 
They represent statutory measures adjusted for items which could  
distort the understanding of performance and comparability year on 
year, namely the amortisation of acquired intangibles and exceptional 
items, related tax and exceptional tax items where relevant. Page 27 
provides a reconciliation between APMs and statutory IFRS measures.

1. ACCOUNTING POLICIES (CONTINUED)

A deferred tax asset is recognised only to the extent that it is probable 
that future taxable profits will be available against which the asset can be 
utilised. Deferred tax assets are reduced to the extent that it is no longer 
probable that the related tax benefit will be realised.

Operating segments 
Operating segments are identified on the basis of information that 
is provided to the Executive Management Team (EMT), which is the 
Group’s chief operating decision-maker, to allocate capital and resources 
and to assess performance.

Derivative financial instruments and hedge accounting
The Group uses derivative financial instruments to hedge its exposure 
to foreign exchange and interest rate risks arising from operational, 
financing and investment activities. In accordance with its treasury policy, 
the Group does not hold or issue derivative financial instruments for 
trading purposes. However, derivatives that do not qualify for hedge 
accounting are accounted for as trading instruments.

Derivative financial instruments which are accounted for as trading 
instruments are recognised initially and subsequently stated at fair 
value. The gain or loss on remeasurement to fair value is recognised 
immediately in the income statement. However, where derivatives 
qualify for hedge accounting, recognition of any resultant gain or loss 
depends on the nature of the item being hedged.

The fair value of interest rate swaps is determined by discounting 
the future cash flows at rates determined by year end yield curves.

The fair value of forward exchange contracts is their quoted market 
price at the balance sheet date, being the present value of the quoted 
forward price.

Upon initial recognition attributable transaction costs are recognised 
in the income statement when incurred. 

Fair value hedges
Where a derivative financial instrument is designated as a hedge of the 
variability in fair value of a recognised asset or liability or an unrecognised 
firm commitment, all changes in the fair value of the derivative are 
recognised immediately in the income statement. The carrying value 
of the hedged item is adjusted by the change in fair value that is 
attributable to the risk being hedged (even if it is normally carried at cost 
or amortised cost) and any gains or losses on remeasurement are also 
recognised immediately in the income statement (even if those gains 
would normally be recognised directly in reserves). Hedge accounting 
is discontinued when the Group revokes the hedging relationship, the 
hedge instrument expires or is sold, terminated, exercised or no longer 
qualifies for hedge accounting. The adjustment to the carrying amount 
of the hedged item arising from the hedged risk is amortised to profit 
or loss from that date.

Cash flow hedges
Where a derivative financial instrument is designated as a hedge of the 
variability in cash flows of a highly probable forecast transaction, the 
effective part of any gain or loss on the derivative financial instrument 
is recognised directly in equity within hedging reserves. The ineffective 
part of any gain or loss is recognised immediately within operating 
profit, or within net financing costs in the case of interest rate swaps 
designated as cash flow hedges. When the forecast transaction that was 
being hedged is realised and affects profit or loss, the cumulative gain 
or loss on the derivative financial instrument is removed from equity 
and recognised in the income statement in the same period. When the 
forecast transaction subsequently results in the recognition of a non-
financial asset or non-financial liability, the associated cumulative gain 
or loss is removed from equity and included in the initial cost or other 
carrying amount of the non-financial asset or non-financial liability.

77

Strategic reportGovernanceDirectors’ remuneration reportDirectors’ reportIndependent auditor’s reportAccountsWincanton plc Annual Report and Accounts 2018NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS CONTINUED

2. OPERATING SEGMENTS 

Wincanton plc provides contract logistics services in the UK and Ireland. The Group manages its operations in two distinct operating segments;  
Retail & Consumer (including retail general merchandise, retail grocery and consumer products) and Industrial & Transport (including transport 
services, construction and other).

The results of the operating segments are regularly reviewed by the Executive Management Team (EMT) to allocate resources to these segments 
and to assess their performance. The Group evaluates the performance of the operating segments on the basis of revenue and underlying operating 
profit. Assets and liabilities are reviewed at a consolidated level only, therefore segmental information is not provided.

Revenue from external customers1
Underlying EBITDA2
Depreciation 
Amortisation of software intangibles
Underlying operating profit2
Amortisation of acquired intangibles
Exceptional items
Operating profit
Net financing costs
Profit before tax

Total Group assets3
Additions to reportable segment non-current assets:
– property, plant and equipment
– computer software costs
Total Group liabilities

Retail & 
Consumer 
2018
£m
691.7
36.4
(5.6)
(1.1)
29.7

Industrial & 
Transport 
2018
£m
480.2
28.4
(4.4)
(0.8)
23.2

3.7
–

10.8
–

Note

10
9

3

5

10
9

Retail & 
Consumer 
2017
£m
649.3
32.0
(5.0)
(1.2)
25.8

Industrial & 
Transport 
2017
£m
468.8
31.9
(4.8)
(0.8)
26.3

3.0
0.7

15.0
0.5

Total  
2018
£m
1,171.9
64.8
(10.0)
(1.9)
52.9
(2.3)
(6.2)
44.4
(6.5)
37.9

304.8

14.5
–
(417.3)

Total
2017 
£m
1,118.1
63.9
(9.8)
(2.0)
52.1
(2.2)
6.1
56.0
(10.6)
45.4

326.2

18.0
1.2
(465.6)

1  Included in segment revenue is £1,160.4m (2017: £1,109.0m) in respect of customers based in the UK.
2  Underlying EBITDA refers to underlying operating profit before depreciation and amortisation. Underlying operating profit is stated before amortisation of acquired intangibles and 

exceptional items.

3  Total Group assets include non-current assets of £136.0m, of which £135.9m (2017: £147.9m) are held in the UK. 

Revenue of £212.5m (2017: £201.7m) and £145.7m (2017: £143.3m) arose from sales to the Group’s two largest single customers, being groups of 
companies under common control, and is reported within the Retail & Consumer segment above. No other single customer or group of customers 
under common control contributed 10% or more to the Group’s revenue in either the current or prior year.

78

AccountsWincanton plc Annual Report and Accounts 20183. OPERATING PROFIT

Revenue
Cost of sales
Gross profit
Administrative expenses
Operating profit

2018

Amortisation and
Exceptional items2
£m
–
(5.2)
(5.2)
(3.3)
(8.5)

Underlying1
£m
1,171.9
(1,101.7)
70.2
(17.3)
52.9

Total
£m
1,171.9
(1,106.9)
65.0
(20.6)
44.4

2017

Amortisation and
Exceptional items2
£m
–
–
–
3.9
3.9

Underlying1
£m
1,118.1
(1,047.2)
70.9
(18.8)
52.1

Total
£m
1,118.1
(1,047.2)
70.9
(14.9)
56.0

1  Underlying operating profit is stated before amortisation of acquired intangibles and exceptional items. 
2   Comprises the amortisation of acquired intangibles and exceptional items.

The following items have been charged in arriving at operating profit:
Auditor’s remuneration:
Audit fees for statutory audit services
– parent company
– subsidiary undertakings
Non-audit fees
– fees paid to the auditor and its associates for assurance services
Depreciation and other amounts written off property, plant and equipment
Amortisation and other amounts written off software intangibles
Amortisation of acquired intangibles
Operating lease rentals
– plant and equipment
– land and buildings

Exceptional items

Restructuring costs
Pension liability management exercise
Other items

Note

2018 
£m

2017 
£m

10
9
9

0.1
0.2

0.1
10.0
1.9
2.3

29.2
21.0

2018 
£m
(8.2)
2.0
–
(6.2)

–
0.2

0.1
9.8
2.0
2.2

25.7
20.1

2017 
£m
–
(0.9)
7.0
6.1

The Group has undertaken a restructuring programme in the year, within the Industrial & Transport sector and the Group’s support functions, to 
ensure that the business is competitively positioned for the future. A charge of £8.2m is included as exceptional for the year comprising primarily  
of the costs of exit of people and associated property costs.

The Group initiated a pension scheme liability management exercise in conjunction with the Trustee at the end of last year. The estimated costs  
of the exercise were accrued in the prior year, with the settlement gains and adjustment to the estimated costs being recognised in the current year.

Other items in the prior year of £7.0m comprise non-cash gains of £4.6m which were recognised on the remeasurement of liabilities relating to 
disposed businesses, including warranty balances held in respect of the disposal of the European operations and WRM; and the settlement of  
a claim against a supplier.

79

Strategic reportGovernanceDirectors’ remuneration reportDirectors’ reportIndependent auditor’s reportAccountsWincanton plc Annual Report and Accounts 2018NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS CONTINUED

4. PERSONNEL EXPENSES, INCLUDING DIRECTORS

Wages and salaries
Share based payments (including IFRS 2 fair value charges)
Social security contributions
Contributions to defined contribution pension arrangements

Average number of persons employed by the Group (including Directors) during the year

Note

24

2018 
£m
473.0
1.3
48.7
19.0
542.0

2017 
£m
461.6
1.7
44.6
17.9
525.8

2018
17,500

2017
17,170

Directors’ emoluments

Salaries
Bonus
Other benefits
Non-executive Directors’ fees
Total emoluments

2018 
£’000
743
588
186
368
1,885

Full details of each individual Director’s emoluments, bonuses, share options and pension entitlements are given in the Annual Report on 
Remuneration on pages 43 to 51.  

5. NET FINANCING COSTS

Recognised in the income statement 

Interest income
Interest expense
Unwinding of discount on provisions
Interest on the net defined benefit pension liability

Net financing costs

Recognised in other comprehensive income 

Foreign currency translation differences for foreign operations – recognised in the translation reserve

Note

20
24

2018 
£m
–
(4.1)
(0.6)
(1.8)
(6.5)
(6.5)

2018 
£m
–

2017 
£’000
734
755
183
366
2,038

2017 
£m
0.1
(6.0)
(1.2)
(3.5)
(10.7)
(10.6)

2017 
£m
(0.1)

80

AccountsWincanton plc Annual Report and Accounts 2018 
6. INCOME TAX EXPENSE

Recognised in the income statement 

Current tax expense
Current year
Adjustments for prior years

Deferred tax expense
Current year
Adjustments for prior years

Total income tax expense

Reconciliation of effective tax rate 
Profit before tax
Income tax using the UK corporation tax rate of 19% (2017: 20%)
Non-deductible expenditure
Non-taxable income
Change in UK corporation tax rate
Effect of tax rate in foreign jurisdictions
Adjustments for prior years
– current tax
– deferred tax
Other
Total tax expense for the year

Recognised in other comprehensive income

Items which will not subsequently be reclassified to the Income statement:
Remeasurements of defined benefit pension liability

Recognised directly in equity

Current tax on share based payment transactions
Deferred tax on share based payments transactions

2018 
£m

4.2
(0.8)
3.4

3.0
0.3
3.3
6.7

2018 
£m

37.9
7.2
0.3
–
(0.3)
–

(0.8)
0.3
–
6.7

2018 
£m

2.4

2018 
£m
(0.1)
–
(0.1)

2017 
£m

7.0
(4.3)
2.7

1.6
(0.9)
0.7
3.4

2017 
£m

45.4
9.1
0.4
(1.0)
–
(0.1)

(4.3)
(0.9)
0.2
3.4

2017 
£m

4.0

2017 
£m
(1.1)
0.1
(1.0)

The main UK Corporation tax rate reduced to 19% with effect from 1 April 2017 (20% prior to 1 April 2017) and will further reduce to 17% with effect 
from 1 April 2020 which should reduce the Group’s future current tax charge accordingly.

The Group maintains a provision against tax risks, which is included within income tax payable.

The total tax expense above includes tax credits of £0.4m (2017: £0.4m) in respect of amortisation of acquired intangibles and exceptional tax 
of £1.2m (2017: £3.7m).

81

Strategic reportGovernanceDirectors’ remuneration reportDirectors’ reportIndependent auditor’s reportAccountsWincanton plc Annual Report and Accounts 2018 
NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS CONTINUED

7. EARNINGS PER SHARE

Earnings per share calculation is based on the profit attributable to the equity shareholders of Wincanton plc of £31.2m (2017: £42.0m) and the 
weighted average shares in issue throughout the year as calculated below of 123.8m (2017: 122.8m). The diluted earnings per share calculation is based 
on there being 2.1m (2017: 4.3m) additional shares deemed to be issued at £nil consideration under the Company’s share option schemes. 

Weighted average number of Ordinary Shares (basic)
Issued Ordinary Shares at the beginning of the year
Net effect of shares issued and purchased during the year

Weighted average number of Ordinary Shares (diluted)
Weighted average number of Ordinary Shares for the year (as above)
Effect of share options on issue

2018 
millions

2017 
millions

123.5
0.3
123.8

123.8
2.1
125.9

121.9
0.9
122.8

122.8
4.3
127.1

An alternative earnings per share measure is set out below, being earnings before amortisation of acquired intangibles and exceptional items, 
including related tax and exceptional tax items where applicable, since the Directors consider that this provides further information on the underlying 
performance of the Group:

Underlying earnings per share
– basic
– diluted

Underlying earnings are determined as follows:

Profit for the year attributable to equity shareholders of Wincanton plc
Exceptional items
Amortisation of acquired intangibles
Tax impact of above items and exceptional tax items
Underlying earnings

8. DIVIDENDS 

Dividends paid in the year comprise:

Final dividend for the year ended 31 March 2017 of 6.1p per share (2016: 5.5p)
Interim dividend for the period ended 30 September 2017 of 3.27p per share (2016: 3.0p)

Note

3
9

2018 
pence

30.8
30.3

2018 
£m
31.2
6.2
2.3
(1.6)
38.1

2018
£m
7.6
4.0
11.6

2017 
pence

27.7
26.8

2017 
£m
42.0
(6.1)
2.2
(4.1)
34.0

2017
£m
6.7
3.7
10.4

The Directors are proposing a final dividend of 6.63p per share for the year ended 31 March 2018 (2017: 6.1p) which, if approved by shareholders, will be 
paid on 3 August 2018 to shareholders on the register on 6 July 2018, an estimated total of £8.2m. The proposed final dividend is subject to approval 
by shareholders at the Annual General Meeting on 28 June 2018 and in accordance with Adopted IFRS has not been included as a liability in these 
financial statements.

In setting the dividend the Directors have considered a range of factors, including the Group‘s strategy (including downside sensitivities), the Group’s 
net debt position, the current and projected level of distributable reserves and projected cash flows.

The Employee Benefit Trust has waived the right to receive dividends in respect of the shares it holds, see Note 21 for further detail.

82

AccountsWincanton plc Annual Report and Accounts 20189. GOODWILL AND INTANGIBLE ASSETS

Cost
At 1 April 2016
Effect of movements in foreign exchange
Additions
Disposals
At 31 March 2017
At 1 April 2017
Effect of movements in foreign exchange
Disposals
At 31 March 2018
Amortisation and impairment losses
At 1 April 2016
Charge for year
Disposals
At 31 March 2017
At 1 April 2017
Charge for year
Disposals
At 31 March 2018
Carrying value
At 1 April 2016
At 31 March 2017 and 1 April 2017
At 31 March 2018

Note

Goodwill 
£m

Acquired 
intangibles 
£m

Computer 
software costs 
£m

2

2, 3

2, 3

79.6
0.3
–
–
79.9
79.9
0.1
–
80.0

(2.5)
–
–
(2.5)
(2.5)
–
–
(2.5)

77.1
77.4
77.5

66.5
–
–
–
66.5
66.5
–
–
66.5

(62.0)
(2.2)
–
(64.2)
(64.2)
(2.3)
–
(66.5)

4.5
2.3
–

39.3
–
1.2
(0.7)
39.8
39.8
–
(0.6)
39.2

(30.9)
(2.0)
0.3
(32.6)
(32.6)
(1.9)
0.5
(34.0)

8.4
7.2
5.2

Total 
£m

185.4
0.3
1.2
(0.7)
186.2
186.2
0.1
(0.6)
185.7

(95.4)
(4.2)
0.3
(99.3)
(99.3)
(4.2)
0.5
(103.0)

90.0
86.9
82.7

The carrying value of acquired intangibles at 31 March 2017 and 1 April 2016 related entirely to customer relationships.

The total amortisation charge of £4.2m (2017: £4.2m) is recognised in the income statement with £1.9m (2017: £2.0m) of computer software 
amortisation included within cost of sales and £2.3m (2017: £2.2m) of amortisation of acquired intangibles within administrative expenses.

Impairment tests for goodwill
Goodwill is allocated to the Group’s cash-generating units (CGUs) which are in line with the Group’s reported operating segments, as per the 
table below.

Retail & Consumer
Industrial & Transport

2018 
£m
25.8
51.7
77.5

2017
£m
25.8
51.6
77.4

The recoverable amount of a CGU is determined based on value in use calculations. These calculations are cash flow projections based on the 
financial budgets and forecasts approved by the Board for the forthcoming financial year and 24 months beyond. The financial budgets and forecasts 
have been set on a contract by contract basis, taking account of prior year results and expected developments. Cash flows beyond those 12-month 
and further 24-month periods are extrapolated to perpetuity using the estimated growth rates and underlying inflation rates stated below, which  
do not exceed the long term average growth and inflation rates in the specific geographical area where the CGU operates.

Key assumptions used for value in use calculations: 

Estimated growth rate
Underlying inflation rate
Discount rate

2018

2017

Retail &
Consumer 
%
1.6
2.2
12.3

Industrial & 
Transport 
%
1.6
2.2
12.4

Retail &
Consumer 
%
1.7
2.1
8.6

Industrial & 
Transport 
%
1.7
2.1
8.6

83

Strategic reportGovernanceDirectors’ remuneration reportDirectors’ reportIndependent auditor’s reportAccountsWincanton plc Annual Report and Accounts 2018NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS CONTINUED

9. GOODWILL AND INTANGIBLE ASSETS (CONTINUED)

Management determined the growth rates and underlying inflation rates based on expectations for market development and these are consistent 
with external forecasts and historical trends. The methodology for determining the pre-tax discount rates has been updated in the current year to 
reflect relevant risks specific to the individual CGUs.

Sensitivity to changes in assumptions
The estimated recoverable amounts for both the Retail & Consumer and the Industrial & Transport CGUs exceed their respective carrying amounts 
by approximately £300m and £96m (2017: £382m and £356m respectively). The Group has conducted sensitivity analysis on the impairment 
testing. Management believe no significant change in the key assumptions would cause the carrying amount to exceed the recoverable amount 
for either CGU.

10. PROPERTY, PLANT AND EQUIPMENT

Note

Property 
£m

Plant and 
equipment 
£m

Cost
At 1 April 2016
Effect of movements in foreign exchange
Additions
Disposals
At 31 March 2017
At 1 April 2017
Additions
Disposals
Reclassified as assets held for sale
At 31 March 2018
Depreciation and impairment losses
At 1 April 2016
Effect of movements in foreign exchange
Charge for year
Disposals
At 31 March 2017
At 1 April 2017
Charge for year
Disposals
Reclassified as assets held for sale
At 31 March 2018
Carrying amount
At 1 April 2016
At 31 March 2017 and 1 April 2017
At 31 March 2018

2

2

2, 3

2, 3

42.6
0.1
–
(0.1)
42.6
42.6
0.6
(0.9)
(10.5)
31.8

(28.3)
(0.1)
(0.6)
0.2
(28.8)
(28.8)
(0.7)
0.8
4.7
(24.0)

14.3
13.8
7.8

Included in the total cost of property, plant and equipment is £1.0m (2016: £1.0m) in respect of capitalised finance costs. 

The carrying amount of property comprises: 

Freehold
Short leasehold

84

133.1
0.1
18.0
(12.2)
139.0
139.0
13.9
(12.0)
(0.3)
140.6

(111.8)
(0.1)
(9.2)
12.0
(109.1)
(109.1)
(9.3)
11.7
–
(106.7)

21.3
29.9
33.9

2018 
£m
3.8
4.0
7.8

Total 
£m

175.7
0.2
18.0
(12.3)
181.6
181.6
14.5
(12.9)
(10.8)
172.4

(140.1)
(0.2)
(9.8)
12.2
(137.9)
(137.9)
(10.0)
12.5
4.7
(130.7)

35.6
43.7
41.7

2017 
£m
10.3
3.5
13.8

AccountsWincanton plc Annual Report and Accounts 201811. INVESTMENTS IN SUBSIDIARIES

The significant subsidiaries and jointly controlled entity as at 31 March 2018 in the Wincanton group of companies, based on the scale of their 
activities, are as follows:

Wincanton Holdings Limited 
Wincanton Group Limited 
Wincanton UK Limited4
Wincanton Ireland Limited
Risk Underwriting (Guernsey) Limited
Wincanton Pullman Fleet Services Limited
UDS Properties Limited

C.E.L. Group Limited
Corstor Limited

Principal activity % of equity held5
100
100
100
100
100
100

Contract logistics services
Contract logistics services
Intermediate holding company
Contract logistics services
Insurance subsidiary
Maintenance and repair of motor vehicles
Building and letting of specialised 
warehousing facilities
Intermediate holding company
Container storage and repair

Country of incorporation and  
registered office
England and Wales1
England and Wales1
England and Wales1
Republic of Ireland3
Guernsey2
England and Wales1

100
100
50

England and Wales1
England and Wales1
England and Wales1

Other subsidiaries and jointly controlled entity as at 31 March 2018:

C.E.L. (Engineering) Limited 
CEL (Logistics) Limited
City Self Storage Limited
Data and Records Management Limited
East Anglia Freight Terminal (Holdings) Limited
East Anglia Freight Terminal Limited 
Glass Glover Group Limited
Glass Glover Management Services Limited
Hanbury Davies Containers Limited
Hanbury Davies Limited
Hanbury Holdings Limited
House of Hill Holdings Limited
House of Hill Limited
Lane Group plc
Minmar (662) Limited
Nair Properties Limited
Product Support (Holdings) Limited
Product Support Limited
Pullman Fleet Services Limited
RDL Distribution Limited
RDL Holdings Limited
R-Log Limited
Roadtanks Limited
Storedco Limited
Swales Haulage Limited
Trans European Holdings Limited
W. Carter (Haulage) Limited
W O Bradstreet Limited
Wincanton (No. 1) Limited
Wincanton (No. 2) Limited
Wincanton (No. 3) Limited
Wincanton Air & Ocean Limited
Wincanton High Tech Limited
Wincanton Logistics Limited

Principal activity % of equity held5
100
100
100
100
84.56
100
100
1007
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
1008
100
100
100
100
50
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
1009
10010
100

Dormant
Dormant
Dormant
Dormant
Dormant
Dormant
Dormant
Dormant
Dormant
Dormant
Dormant
Dormant
Dormant
Dormant
Dormant
Dormant
Dormant
Dormant
Dormant
Dormant
Dormant
Dormant
Dormant
Dormant
Dormant
Dormant
Dormant
Dormant
Dormant
Dormant
Dormant
Dormant
Dormant
Dormant

Country of incorporation and  
registered office
England and Wales1
England and Wales1
Republic of Ireland3
Republic of Ireland3
England and Wales1
England and Wales1
England and Wales1
England and Wales1
England and Wales1
England and Wales1
England and Wales1
England and Wales1
England and Wales1
England and Wales1
England and Wales1
England and Wales1
England and Wales1
England and Wales1
England and Wales1
England and Wales1
England and Wales1
England and Wales1
England and Wales1
England and Wales1
England and Wales1
England and Wales1
England and Wales1
England and Wales1
England and Wales1
England and Wales1
England and Wales1
England and Wales1
England and Wales1
England and Wales1

85

Strategic reportGovernanceDirectors’ remuneration reportDirectors’ reportIndependent auditor’s reportAccountsWincanton plc Annual Report and Accounts 2018NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS CONTINUED

11. INVESTMENTS IN SUBSIDIARIES (CONTINUED)

Wincanton Pension Scheme Trustees Limited

Wincanton Records Management (Ireland) Limited
Wincanton Trans European (Ireland) Limited
Wincanton Trans European Limited
Wincanton Vehicle Rentals Limited

Trustee for the Wincanton plc 
Pension Scheme 
Dormant
Dormant
Dormant
Dormant

100
100
100
100
100

England and Wales1
Republic of Ireland3
Republic of Ireland3
England and Wales1
England and Wales1

Principal activity % of equity held5

Country of incorporation and 
registered office

1  Registered office: Methuen Park, Chippenham, Wiltshire, SN14 0WT.
2  Registered office: Maison Trinity, Trinity Square, St Peter Port, Guernsey, GY1 4AT.
3  Registered office: Unit 1, Rosemount Business Park, Ballycoolin Road, Blanchardstown, Dublin 11.
4  Direct subsidiary of Wincanton plc.
5  All holdings are of Ordinary Shares except where noted.
6  3 ordinary shares and 84,500 B shares.
7  14,762,245 ordinary shares and 10,000,000 6½% cumulative convertible redeemable preference shares.
8  13,600,000 ordinary shares and 409,164 preference shares.
9  19,393,774 ordinary shares and 19,372,074 deferred shares.
10 100 ordinary shares and 1,699,900 redeemable ordinary shares.

12. INTERESTS IN JOINTLY CONTROLLED ENTITIES

Included in the consolidated financial statements of the Group are the following amounts in respect of the Group’s share of the assets and liabilities 
of its joint venture: 

Current assets
Aggregate carrying amount of the Group’s interest in its joint venture

13. DEFERRED TAX ASSETS AND LIABILITIES

Recognised deferred tax assets and liabilities
Deferred tax assets and liabilities are attributable to the following:

Property, plant and equipment
Equity compensation benefits
Pension provisions
Other assets
Other liabilities

Assets

Liabilities

2018 
£m
2.3
0.6
8.4
0.3
(0.1)
11.5

2017 
£m
2.6
1.3
13.3
0.4
(0.4)1
17.2

2018 
£m
–
–
–
–
–
–

2017 
£m
–
–
–
–
–
–

1  Other tax liabilities consist primarily of deferred tax on acquired intangibles.

Unrecognised deferred tax assets and liabilities

Deferred tax asset on losses carried forward

2018 
£m
0.1
0.1

Net

2018 
£m
2.3
0.6
8.4
0.3
(0.1)
11.5

2018 
£m
0.3

2017
£m
0.1
0.1

2017 
£m
2.6
1.3
13.3
0.4
(0.4)
17.2

2017 
£m
0.3

Deferred tax assets have not been recognised in respect of losses carried forward due to the uncertainty of their utilisation in the relevant companies.

Movement in deferred tax assets and liabilities during the current year

Property, plant and equipment
Equity compensation benefits
Pension provisions
Other assets
Other liabilities

86

At
1 April 2017
£m
2.6
1.3
13.3
0.4
(0.4)
17.2

Recognised
in income
£m
(0.3)
(0.7)
(2.5)
(0.1)
0.3
(3.3)

Other
movements
£m
–
–
(2.4)
–
–
(2.4)

At
31 March 2018
£m
2.3
0.6
8.4
0.3
(0.1)
11.5

AccountsWincanton plc Annual Report and Accounts 201814. INVENTORIES

Raw materials and consumables

15. TRADE AND OTHER RECEIVABLES

Trade receivables
Less: provision for doubtful debts
Net trade receivables 
Other receivables
Prepayments and accrued income

2018 
£m
4.4

2018 
£m
81.1
(0.8)
80.3
0.4
60.0
140.7

All receivables are due within one year, except for other receivables which include £0.4m (2017: £0.2m) in respect of amounts recoverable from 
customers and others under contracts of more than one year and prepayments and accrued income which include £0.2m (2017: £0.6m).

Movement in the provision for doubtful debts

At 1 April
Impairment losses recognised on receivables
Amounts written off as unrecoverable
At 31 March

2018 
£m
0.8
0.1
(0.1)
0.8

Ageing of trade receivables and the associated provision for doubtful debts at the balance sheet date

2017 
£m
4.0

2017
£m
87.1
(0.8)
86.3
0.4
46.7
133.4

2017 
£m
0.8
0.1
(0.1)
0.8

Current
1 month overdue
2 months overdue
3+ months overdue

2018

Gross 
£m
79.1
0.7
0.1
1.2
81.1

Provision 
£m
–
–
–
(0.8)
(0.8)

2017

Gross 
£m
79.5
5.5
0.7
1.4
87.1

Provision 
£m
–
–
–
(0.8)
(0.8)

The standard period of credit on sales is up to 30 days. Interest is chargeable on overdue amounts. The Group only provides for doubtful debt 
where, in the opinion of management, the amount is no longer recoverable. The amount of the provision is management’s estimate of the 
irrecoverable amount.

16. ASSETS CLASSIFIED AS HELD FOR SALE

At 31 March 2018 the Group has exchanged contracts for the disposal of a property with a carrying value of £6.1m. Completion of the disposal 
is conditional on the property being in an acceptable condition and is expected to take place on 31 May 2018. The net proceeds of disposal are 
expected to exceed the carrying value and accordingly no impairment loss has been recognised on reclassification. The property is currently held 
within Retail & Consumer.

17. CASH AND CASH EQUIVALENTS 

Cash at bank and in hand
Restricted cash deposits held by the Group’s insurance subsidiary
Cash and cash equivalents 

Details of the Group’s treasury policies are set out in Note 26.

2018 
£m
11.7
5.9
17.6

2017 
£m
33.0
7.9
40.9

87

Strategic reportGovernanceDirectors’ remuneration reportDirectors’ reportIndependent auditor’s reportAccountsWincanton plc Annual Report and Accounts 2018NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS CONTINUED

18. BORROWINGS AND OTHER FINANCIAL LIABILITIES

Current
Bank loans and overdrafts
Other financial liabilities

Non-current
Bank loans
Other financial liabilities

The following are the contractual maturities of financial liabilities, excluding interest payments:

At 31 March 2018

2018 
£m

–
–
–

47.0
0.1
47.1

2017 
£m

0.1
0.1
0.2

65.0
–
65.0

Carrying 
amount 
£m

Contractual 
cash flows 
£m

Less than 
1 year 
£m

Between 
1 and 5 years 
£m

Over 
5 years 
£m

47.0
264.1

0.2
(0.1)
311.2

47.0
264.1

0.2
(0.1)
311.2

–
264.1

0.1
(0.1)
264.1

47.0
–

0.1
–
47.1

–
–

–
–
–

Carrying 
amount 
£m

Contractual 
cash flows 
£m

Less than 
1 year 
£m

Between 
1 and 5 years 
£m

Over 
5 years 
£m

65.1
265.4

0.6
(0.5)
330.6

65.1
265.4

0.6
(0.5)
330.6

0.1
265.4

0.3
(0.2)
265.6

65.0
–

0.3
(0.3)
65.0

2018 
£m

54.8
39.9
27.5
141.9
264.1

–
–

–
–
–

2017 
£m

42.2
36.6
34.3
152.3
265.4

Non-derivative financial liabilities
Bank loans and overdrafts
Trade and other payables
Derivative financial liabilities
Interest rate swaps
Forward foreign exchange contracts

At 31 March 2017

Non-derivative financial liabilities
Bank loans and overdrafts
Trade and other payables
Derivative financial liabilities
Interest rate swaps
Forward foreign exchange contracts

19. TRADE AND OTHER PAYABLES

Current
Trade payables
Other taxes and social security
Other payables
Accruals and deferred income

88

AccountsWincanton plc Annual Report and Accounts 201820. PROVISIONS

At 1 April 2017
Provisions made during the year
Provisions used during the year
Provisions released during the year
Unwinding of discount
Effect of movements in foreign exchange
At 31 March 2018

Current 
Non-current

Note

5

Insurance 
£m
33.5
9.2
(7.9)
(7.1)
0.4
–
28.1

7.7
20.4
28.1

Property 
£m
16.5
7.2
(3.9)
(2.1)
0.2
0.1
18.0

5.9
12.1
18.0

Other 
provisions 
£m
–
8.7
(3.9)
–
–
–
4.8

4.2
0.6
4.8

Total 
£m
50.0
25.1
(15.7)
(9.2)
0.6
0.1
50.9

17.8
33.1
50.9

The Group owns 100% of the share capital of an insurance company which insures certain of the risks of the Group. The insurance provisions  
in the above table are held in respect of outstanding insurance claims, the majority of which are expected to be paid within one to seven years. 
Provisions are released when the obligation no longer exists or there is a reduction in management’s estimate of the liability. The discount unwinding 
arises primarily on the employers’ liability policy which is discounted over a period of seven years at a rate based on the Group’s assessment of a  
risk free rate.

The property provisions are determined on a site by site basis and comprise both provisions for onerous leases and dilapidations. The onerous lease 
provision is the Group’s best estimate of the expected costs of empty and under-utilised properties. Dilapidation provisions comprise dilapidation 
estimates made in the normal course of business. During the year we have refined our methodology for providing for dilapidations which has resulted 
in a small increase in the liability and some grossing up of movements previously reported net. Provisions are released when the obligation no longer 
exists or there is a reduction in the estimate. The onerous lease provisions are utilised over the relevant lease term, with the majority expected to 
be utilised over the next three years. Estimated costs have been discounted at a rate based on the Group’s assessment of a risk free rate, with any 
estimated revenue being discounted at a rate reflecting an appropriate level of risk.

Other provisions include the estimated costs of the restructuring programme together with provision for sundry claims and settlements where the 
outcome is uncertain.

21. CAPITAL AND RESERVES

Share capital 

Allotted, called up and fully paid
At 1 April
Issued during the year
In issue at 31 March

10p Ordinary Shares

2018 
millions
123.7
0.8
124.5

2017 
millions
123.7
–
123.7

The number of shares detailed above differs from those in Note 7 as a result of the inclusion, in the above total, of the shares held within an Employee 
Benefit Trust (EBT) and also the effect of weighting for the purpose of the earnings per share calculations.

The holders of Ordinary Shares are entitled to receive dividends as declared from time to time. At general meetings of shareholders each shareholder 
(or appointed proxy) present in person is entitled to vote; on a show of hands each person has one vote, and on a poll has one vote per share. 
In respect of the Company’s shares that are held by the EBT (see over), all rights are suspended until these shares are reissued.

During the year ended 31 March 2002, the Company established a Capital Redemption Reserve of £49,998 on redemption of redeemable 
preference shares.

Merger reserve
The merger reserve arose from the original acquisition of the then Wincanton group of companies by Wincanton plc, on the demerger from the 
previous parent in May 2001, which was accounted for under merger accounting principles.

Hedging reserve
Where a derivative financial instrument is designated as a hedge of the variability in cash flows of a highly probable forecast transaction, the effective 
part of the gain or loss on the derivative is recognised directly in equity within the hedging reserve. When the forecast transaction that was being 
hedged is realised the cumulative gain or loss on the derivative is recognised in the income statement in the same period.

Translation reserve
The translation reserve comprises all foreign exchange differences arising from the translation of the financial statements of foreign operations as well 
as from any translation of liabilities that hedge the Company’s net investment in foreign subsidiaries. 

89

Strategic reportGovernanceDirectors’ remuneration reportDirectors’ reportIndependent auditor’s reportAccountsWincanton plc Annual Report and Accounts 2018NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS CONTINUED

21. CAPITAL AND RESERVES (CONTINUED)

Own shares
The own shares reserve comprises the cost of the Company’s shares held by the EBT established in Jersey and managed on its behalf by independent 
trustees. At 31 March 2018, the number of the Company’s shares held by the EBT had increased to 804,950 (2017: 295,033). The EBT has waived the right 
to receive dividends in respect of the shares it holds. The average cost of the shares held is 245p each (2017: 161p) and at 31 March 2018, the market 
value of the shares held was £1.8m (2017: £0.8m).

All of the shares in the EBT are held in respect of the Group’s various equity compensation schemes (see Note 25) and at 31 March 2018 there were 
589,367 (2017: 295,033) shares held in respect of vested options.

22. CAPITAL COMMITMENTS

Capital commitments for the Group at the end of the financial year for which no provision has been made, are as follows:

Contracted

23. OPERATING LEASES

2018 
£m
0.3

2017 
£m
9.7

Leases as lessee
The Group leases warehousing facilities, commercial vehicles and other logistics equipment for use in its operations. Typical lease periods for new 
warehouse rental contracts are between three and ten years although older rental contracts are for longer periods with intervening break clauses. 
The average period for vehicles and equipment is five years. The amounts charged to the income statement in the current and prior years are shown 
in Note 3.

The total future minimum lease payments under non-cancellable operating leases fall due for repayment as follows:

Less than 1 year
Between 1 and 5 years
More than 5 years

2018

2017

Plant and 
 equipment 
£m
24.9
48.2
1.7
74.8

Land and 
 buildings 
£m
18.1
39.2
101.8
159.1

Plant and 
 equipment 
£m
19.0
30.9
1.2
51.1

Land and 
 buildings 
£m
19.0
46.7
108.5
174.2

Wherever possible these commitments are mitigated through contractual commitments from customers for whom the properties are occupied and/or 
vehicles and plant are rented. The degree of mitigation can be banded according to the nature of the contract between the Group and its customers. 
This includes ‘back-to-back’ leases which are fully underwritten by customers throughout the life of the lease and multi-user locations where, 
although there is no specific matching of lease and contract terms, there are varying degrees of contract backing and therefore mitigation is spread 
across a number of customers. 

A summary of leases by customer contract type is shown in the following table:

Element of lease underwritten by customer contract
Element of lease where the period of the lease extends beyond the current  
  maturity of the customer contract
Multi-user locations where mitigation is spread across a number of customers
Leases with limited or no mitigation

Covered by property provision

2018

Plant and 
 equipment 
£m
63.0

4.9
6.0
0.9
74.8
–
74.8

Land and 
 buildings 
£m
19.9

8.8
119.7
4.2
152.6
6.5
159.1

2017

Plant and 
 equipment 
£m
30.8

14.1
5.1
1.1
51.1
–
51.1

Land and 
 buildings 
£m
30.1

8.4
120.7
7.5
166.7
7.5
174.2

90

AccountsWincanton plc Annual Report and Accounts 201824. EMPLOYEE BENEFITS

The employee benefit liabilities of the Group comprise the post-retirement obligations of the Group’s pension arrangements, which are discussed in 
detail below:

Holiday pay
Pension schemes (see below)

These employee benefits are split as follows:
Current
Non-current

2018 
£m
–
49.5
49.5

–
49.5
49.5

2017 
£m
0.2
78.4
78.6

0.2
78.4
78.6

Pension schemes
Employees of Wincanton participated in funded pension arrangements in the UK and Ireland during the year ended 31 March 2018 details of which 
are given below. 

The principal Wincanton Scheme in the UK (the Scheme) is a funded arrangement which has two defined benefit sections and two defined 
contribution sections, called the Wincanton Retirement Savings Section and the Wincanton Pension Builder Plan. The employees of Wincanton 
Ireland Limited are eligible to participate in a separate defined contribution scheme. Assets of these pension arrangements are held in separate 
Trustee administered funds independent of Wincanton. The weighted average duration of the funded defined benefit obligation is approximately 
20 years.

In previous years, a small number of employees, who were subject to the statutory earnings cap on pensionable earnings prior to 6 April 2006, were 
entitled to participate in an unfunded unapproved arrangement in addition to accruing benefits from the Scheme. There have been no active 
members of this arrangement throughout the years ended 31 March 2017 and 2018.

The defined benefit sections of the Scheme were closed to future accrual on 31 March 2014. This means that no future service benefit will accrue  
but pensions built up to the date of closure have been preserved. 

The latest formal valuation of the Scheme was carried out as at 31 March 2014 by the Scheme actuary, Hymans Robertson, and was agreed with 
the Trustee in 2015. In addition, it was agreed that certain administration expenses would be paid directly by the Group and deducted from the 
deficit funding contributions. The expenses, which amount to £0.7m (2017: £0.7m), are not included in the contributions below. The deficit funding 
contribution in the year net of these expenses was £14.6m (2017: £14.1m) with a further £1.5m top up payment to the Scheme as a result of an 
enhanced transfer value exercise. Discussions are ongoing with the Trustee in respect of the triennial valuation of the Scheme. The future deficit 
funding contributions are subject to the outcome of these discussions which we expect to conclude in 2018. 

The defined benefit sections of the Scheme expose the Group to various risks: longevity risk (members living longer than expected), inflation and 
interest rate risk (higher or lower than expected), and market (investment) risk (lower returns than expected). The Trustee and Group have taken steps 
to mitigate these risks through the use of:

 • hedging instruments within the investment portfolio; and 
 • diversification of the investment portfolio. 

The Group is not exposed to any unusual, entity specific or scheme specific risks. 

91

Strategic reportGovernanceDirectors’ remuneration reportDirectors’ reportIndependent auditor’s reportAccountsWincanton plc Annual Report and Accounts 2018NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS CONTINUED

24. EMPLOYEE BENEFITS (CONTINUED)

The assets and liabilities of the defined benefit sections of the Group are calculated in accordance with IAS 19 Employee Benefits (Revised) and are  
set out in the tables below.

The calculations under IAS 19 are based on actuarial assumptions which are the best estimates chosen from a range of possible assumptions about 
the long term future which, unless by chance, will not necessarily be borne out in practice. The fair value of the assets, which are not intended to be 
realised in the short term, may be subject to significant change before they are realised, and the present value of the liabilities are derived from cash 
flow projections over long periods and are thus inherently uncertain.

Present value of unfunded defined benefit obligations
Present value of funded defined benefit obligations
Fair value of Scheme assets
Net defined benefit liability

2018 
£m
(2.3)
(1,123.1)
1,075.9
(49.5)

2017 
£m
(2.2)
(1,156.7)
1,080.5
(78.4)

The movement in the above net defined benefit liability in the year was primarily the result of a reduction in liabilities due to demographic 
assumptions, an increase in the market value of the investments and contributions received from the Group, being partly offset by an increase in 
liabilities resulting from an increase in the inflation rate assumption. The net defined benefit liability, after taking into account the related deferred tax 
asset, is £41.1m (2017: £65.1m).

Movements in the present value of the net defined benefit liability

Assets
£m
1,080.5

Obligations
£m
(1,156.7)

Net liability
£m
(76.2)

Unfunded 
arrangements
£m
(2.2)

Total  
net liability
£m
(78.4)

(1.7)
(25.8)
27.3

16.8
(39.5)

–
–
–

18.3
1,075.9

Assets
£m
897.1

(1.7)
30.8

14.8
(57.0)

–

–

196.5
1,080.5

–
27.6
(29.1)

–
39.5

(33.4)
23.8
5.2

–
(1,123.1)

Obligations
£m
(1,001.0)

–
(34.2)

–
57.0

(202.1)
24.2
(0.6)

–
(1,156.7)

(1.7)
1.8
(1.8)

16.8
–

(33.4)
23.8
5.2

18.3
(47.2)

–
–
–

–
–

(0.1)
–
–

–
(2.3)

(1.7)
1.8
(1.8)

16.8
–

(33.5)
23.8
5.2

18.3
(49.5)

Net liability
£m
(103.9)

Unfunded 
arrangements
£m
(1.7)

Total  
net liability
£m
(105.6)

(1.7)
(3.4)

14.8
–

(202.1)
24.2
(0.6)

196.5
(76.2)

–
(0.1)

–
–

(0.4)
–
–

–
(2.2)

(1.7)
(3.5)

14.8
–

(202.5)
24.2
(0.6)

196.5
(78.4)

31 March 2018
Opening position
Included in Income statement:
  Administration costs 
  Effect of settlements

Interest on the net defined benefit liability

Cash:
  Employer contributions
  Benefits paid
Included in Other comprehensive income:
  Changes in financial assumptions
  Changes in demographic assumptions
  Experience 

 Return on assets excluding amounts included  
in net financing costs

Closing defined benefit liability

31 March 2017
Opening position
Included in Income statement:
  Administration costs 

Interest on the net defined benefit liability

Cash:
  Employer contributions
  Benefits paid
Included in Other comprehensive income:
  Changes in financial assumptions
  Changes in demographic assumptions
  Experience 

 Return on assets excluding amounts included  
in net financing costs

Closing defined benefit liability

92

AccountsWincanton plc Annual Report and Accounts 2018 
 
 
 
24. EMPLOYEE BENEFITS (CONTINUED)

The amounts recognised in the income statement comprise administration costs, the effect of settlements and interest on the net defined benefit 
liability. These charges are included in the following lines in the income statement:

Within underlying operating profit:
Administrative expenses
Within exceptional items:
Effect of settlements
Within finance costs:
Interest on the net defined benefit liability
Recognised in Income statement

The market value of the Scheme assets held at the end of the year were as follows:

Equities and synthetic equities 
Hedge funds
Property and other growth assets
Corporate bonds
Multi asset credits
Senior real estate and private debt
Index-linked gilts (LDI portfolio collateral)
Notional exposure for synthetic equities/LDI hedging arrangements
Other, including cash

Note

5

2018 
£m

(1.7)

1.8

(1.8)
(1.7)

2018 
£m
214.5
51.1
16.3
118.0
82.6
98.9
576.9
(109.7)
27.3
1,075.9

2017 
£m

(1.7)

–

(3.5)
(5.2)

2017 
£m
306.4
67.7
58.3
143.0
78.9
76.2
458.5
(170.1)
61.6
1,080.5

All equities, LDI portfolio collateral, corporate bonds and funds have quoted prices in active markets. The senior real estate and private debt along  
with the property assets are illiquid assets and trade on a less regular basis.

The synthetic equities provide exposure to the UK, North America, Europe, Asia-Pacific and Japan. The LDI portfolio currently hedges 100% 
of the defined benefit scheme’s inflation rate risk and interest rate risk (relative to Scheme assets) through holding a combination of index-linked gilts, 
interest rate and inflation swaps, gilt total return swaps, gilt repos, and cash. The Scheme does not directly hold any financial instruments issued by 
the Company.

Liability for defined benefit obligations
The principal actuarial assumptions for the Scheme and for the UK unfunded arrangement at the balance sheet date were as follows:

Discount rate
Price inflation rate – RPI
Price inflation rate – CPI
Rate of increase of pensions in deferment
Rate of increase of pensions in payment1

2018 
%
2.60
3.35
2.35
2.35
1.85-3.25

2017 
%
2.60
3.15
2.15
2.15
1.75-3.05

1  A range of assumed rates exist due to the application of annual caps and floors to certain elements of service.

The assumptions used for mortality rates for members of these arrangements at the expected retirement age of 65 years are as follows:

Male aged 65 today
Male aged 45 today
Female aged 65 today
Female aged 45 today

2018 
Years
21.1
23.0
22.9
25.4

2017 
Years
21.2
23.5
23.4
26.4

93

Strategic reportGovernanceDirectors’ remuneration reportDirectors’ reportIndependent auditor’s reportAccountsWincanton plc Annual Report and Accounts 2018NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS CONTINUED

24. EMPLOYEE BENEFITS (CONTINUED)

Sensitivity table
The sensitivity of the present value of the Scheme obligations to changes in the key actuarial assumptions are set out in the following table. 
The illustrations consider the result of only a single assumption changing with the others assumed unchanged and includes the impact of the interest 
rate and inflation rate hedging. In reality it is more likely that more than one assumption would change and potentially the results would offset each 
other, for example, a fall in interest rates will increase the Scheme obligations, but may also trigger an offsetting increase in market value of certain 
Scheme assets. 

Discount rate
Price inflation – RPI
Mortality rate

Change in 
assumption
+0.1%
+0.1%
+ 1 year

Increase/(decrease) 
in liability 
£m
(22.0)
14.0
44.9

Increase/(decrease) 
in assets 
£m
(24.0)
13.0
–

Defined contribution schemes
The total expense relating to the Group’s defined contribution schemes in the current year was £19.0m (2017: £17.9m).

25. EQUITY COMPENSATION BENEFITS

Employees of the Group participate, subject to seniority and length of service, in the Long Term Incentive Plan (LTIP). The other scheme in existence is 
the Special Option Plan (SOP), although no grants were made in respect of this scheme in the year. Both of these schemes involve the grant of options 
or conditional awards of shares in the Company.

Grants of options are accounted for in accordance with IFRS 2 Share-based Payments, which requires the fair value of services received in return for 
share options granted to be recognised in the Income statement over the vesting period. The Group recognised total expenses of £1.0m (2017: £0.9m) 
in respect of the costs of equity-settled share based payment transactions during the year.  The fair value of these services is measured by reference 
to the fair value of the share options granted under each scheme.

The number of options outstanding and exercisable in respect of each scheme at 31 March 2018 is as follows:

Long Term Incentive Plan
July 2015
September 2015
July 2016
November 2016
July 2017

Special Option Plan
July 2014
Total number of share options

Outstanding

Exercisable

Option price  
pence/share

Date normally 
exercisable

656,827
142,512
705,215
45,570
710,691
2,260,815

589,367
2,850,182

–
–
–
–
–
–

2018-2025
2018-2025
2019-2026
2019-2026
2020-2027

–
–
–
–
–
–

589,367
589,367

137

2017-2024

The number and weighted average exercise price of all share options extant under the above schemes are as follows:

2018

2017

Options
5,436,334
710,691
(18,927)
(3,277,916)
2,850,182
589,367

Weighted average 
pence
70
–
–
91
28
137

Options
9,387,507
799,458
(879,127)
(3,871,504)
5,436,334
2,237,386

Weighted average  
pence
81
–
218
50
70
68

Outstanding at beginning of period
Granted during the period
Lapsed during the period
Exercised during the period
Outstanding at the end of the period
Exercisable at the end of the period

94

AccountsWincanton plc Annual Report and Accounts 201825. EQUITY COMPENSATION BENEFITS (CONTINUED)

The weighted average share price at the date of exercise for share options exercised during the period was 287p (2017: 203p). The options outstanding 
at 31 March 2018 had a range of exercise prices of between nil and 137p and a weighted average remaining contractual life of eight years. 

Awards made under the Special Option Plan and Long Term Incentive Plan were granted based on the average quoted market price of the 
Company’s shares for a period of up to three business days immediately prior to the date of grant. Upon exercise, all options granted under these 
schemes are equity-settled.

The terms and conditions of the grants to date under these schemes are as follows:

Long Term Incentive Plan
The Group introduced a Long Term Incentive Plan in 2015, which granted the Executive Directors and certain senior managers long term incentive 
awards in the form of nil cost options.

Grant  
date
July 2015
September 2015
July 2016
November 2016
July 2017

Number of 
 options granted
874,876
142,512
753,888
45,570
710,691

Total

2,527,537

Vesting 
conditions
3 years of service plus performance metrics weighted 60% on basic underlying EPS 
growth and 40% on TSR performance relative to the FTSE All-Share Index (excluding 
investment trusts) (the Index). The threshold entry point of 25% vesting for the EPS 
element requires 6% growth per annum, with 100% vesting at 11% per annum. The 
threshold entry point of 25% vesting for the TSR element requires performance in line 
with the Index, with 100% vesting at outperformance of 10% per annum (equivalent 
to 33% over the term of the option). Vesting will be on a straight-line basis between the 
threshold and maximum for both elements.

Contractual 
life years
10

The grants made under this Plan have EPS and TSR growth performance conditions. The EPS requirement is a non-market based performance 
condition and as such is not accounted for in the fair value calculation. The TSR requirement is a market based performance condition and the fair 
value is calculated using a Monte-Carlo pricing model, based on assumptions at the date of the award.

Share price at grant (p)
Exercise price (p)
Risk-free rate (%)
Expected volatility of Wincanton plc (%)
Expected volatility of Index (%)
Expected life (years)
Dividend yield (%)
Fair value per award under TSR condition (p)
Fair value per award under EPS condition (p)

July 2017
grant
250.0
–
0.3
30.9
15.0
3
4.1
120.0
221.0

November 2016
grant
207.0
–
0.8
30.5
16.0
3
4.1
101.0
183.0

July 2016
grant
180.0
–
0.2
32.0
15.2
3
4.5
76.0
157.0

September 2015 
grant
208.0
–
0.8
38.0
12.9
3
3.5
107.0
187.0

July 2015 
grant
187.0
–
1.0
41.2
11.9
3
3.9
97.0
167.0

95

Strategic reportGovernanceDirectors’ remuneration reportDirectors’ reportIndependent auditor’s reportAccountsWincanton plc Annual Report and Accounts 2018NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS CONTINUED

25. EQUITY COMPENSATION BENEFITS (CONTINUED) 

Special Option Plan
Under the Special Option Plan, the Executive Directors and certain senior managers were granted long term incentive awards.

Grant  
date
September 2011
July 2012
January 2013
July 2013
September 2013
November 2013
July 2014
December 2014
Total

Number of 
 options granted
6,060,549
13,293,685
1,059,322
5,868,259
128,395
114,993
2,746,551
250,517
29,522,271

Vesting 
conditions
3 years of service plus an EPS underpin, where the Company’s EPS must not reduce 
over the 3 year vesting period, as well as a performance requirement based on average 
absolute TSR growth over 3 years (the option starts to vest at >10% per annum with 
100% of the option vesting for 22% per annum).

Contractual 
life years
10

The grant made under this Plan has an absolute TSR growth performance condition with an attaching EPS underpin. The EPS requirement is a 
non-market based performance condition and as such is not accounted for in the fair value calculation. The TSR requirement is a market based 
performance condition and the fair value is calculated by applying a discount to the option value. The discount is calculated using a Monte-Carlo 
pricing model and is the expected outcome of meeting the performance condition. The fair value is determined on assumptions at the date of 
the award.

Share price at grant (p)
Exercise price (p)
Risk-free rate (%)
Expected volatility (%)
Expected life (years)
Dividend yield (%)
Fair value (p)

December 2014
grant
155.0
160.7
1.2
42.8
5
4.7
29.0

July 2014
grant
140.0
137.0
2.0
43.1
5
–
41.0

November 2013 
grant
125.3
123.9
1.7
45.5
5
–
39.0

September 2013 
grant
103.3
101.3
1.7
46.3
5
–
33.0

 July 2013 
grant
66.0
67.7
1.3
46.4
5
–
20.0

January 2013 
grant
68.8
70.8
1.1
45.0
5
–
19.9

July 2012 
grant
33.0
36.0
0.7
43.2
5
–
8.6

September 2011 
grant
78.0
90.6
1.5
40.0
5
5.8
9.5

26. FINANCIAL INSTRUMENTS

Financial risk management and treasury policies
The Group, through its activities, is exposed to a range of financial risks. Financial risks are managed through the Group’s centralised treasury function 
which acts within clearly defined policies approved by the Board. These policies are designed to reduce the financial risks faced by the Group relating 
to liquidity risk, market risk (being interest rates, equity prices and currency exchange rate exposure) and credit risk. Transactions of a speculative nature 
are not permitted and the treasury function does not operate as a profit centre.

Liquidity risk
Liquidity risk is the risk that the Group will not be able to meet its financial obligations as they fall due. The Group’s policy on funding capacity 
is to ensure that there is always sufficient long term funding and short term facilities in place to meet foreseeable peak borrowing requirements.

96

AccountsWincanton plc Annual Report and Accounts 201826. FINANCIAL INSTRUMENTS (CONTINUED)

The Group has £141m (2017: £166m) of core committed funding of which £47m was drawn at 31 March 2018 (2017: £65m), leaving headroom of £94m 
(2017: £101m). The Group also has overdraft and other uncommitted facilities. Within the £141m (2017: £166m) of core committed facilities there are no 
term loans which must be drawn (2017: £25m). At certain points in the working capital cycle this had resulted in the Group having cash held in short 
term interest-bearing deposits. The Group also holds cash deposits within its insurance subsidiary; these deposits have a mix of maturities, none of 
which is greater than 12 months. The Group’s net debt at the balance sheet date was:

Total borrowings and other financial liabilities
Cash and cash equivalents
Net debt

See Note 18 for further analysis of the contractual maturities of the financial liabilities.

Analysis of changes in net debt

Cash and bank balances
Bank loans and overdrafts
Other financial liabilities
Net debt

Note
18
17

2018 
£m
(47.1)
17.6
(29.5)

2017 
£m
(65.2)
40.9
(24.3)

1 April 2017
£m
40.9
(65.1)
(0.1)
(24.3)

Cash flow
£m
(23.3)
18.1
–
(5.2)

31 March 2018 
£m
17.6
(47.0)
(0.1)
(29.5)

Market risk
Market risk is the risk that changes in market prices, such as interest rates and foreign exchange rates will affect the Group’s income or the value of its 
holdings of financial instruments.

Interest rate risk
The Group maintains a policy of using derivatives to achieve an appropriate balance between fixed, capped, and floating interest profiles, so as to limit 
the exposure to the cash cost of servicing its debt.

The majority of the Group’s drawn debt at 31 March 2018 was at floating rates. At 31 March 2018, the Group had in place a £20m five year sterling 
interest rate swap (maturing 2019) with an effective rate of 2.0%. The net fair value of the financial instrument used to manage interest rates at the year 
end was £(0.2)m (2017: £(0.6)m).

2018

2017

Sterling
Bank loans and overdrafts
Other financial liabilities
Borrowings
Cash
Net debt
Interest rate swap
Net debt/(cash)
Euro 
Bank loans and overdrafts
Cash
Net debt
Total net debt/(cash)

Floating 
rate 
£m

47.0
0.1
47.1
(16.5)
30.6
(20.0)
10.6

–
(1.1)
(1.1)
9.5

Fixed 
rate 
£m

–
–
–
–
–
20.0
20.0

–
–
–
20.0

Total 
£m

47.0
0.1
47.1
(16.5)
30.6
–
30.6

–
(1.1)
(1.1)
29.5

Floating 
rate 
£m

65.0
0.1
65.1
(40.9)
24.2
(20.0)
4.2

0.1
–
0.1
4.3

Fixed 
rate 
£m

–
–
–
–
–
20.0
20.0

–
–
–
20.0

Total 
£m

65.0
0.1
65.1
(40.9)
24.2
–
24.2

0.1
–
0.1
24.3

97

Strategic reportGovernanceDirectors’ remuneration reportDirectors’ reportIndependent auditor’s reportAccountsWincanton plc Annual Report and Accounts 2018NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS CONTINUED

26. FINANCIAL INSTRUMENTS (CONTINUED)

Interest rate sensitivity
The following table demonstrates the sensitivity to a change in interest rates of 1% on the Group’s profit before tax and on its equity. The impact has 
been calculated by applying the change in interest rates to the weighted average interest rate during the year, and applying this rate to the average 
borrowings during the year, taking into account the impact of the interest rate swap of £20m. A variation of 1% represents management’s view of 
a reasonably possible change in interest rates. Any impact on equity excludes the possible effect which a change in interest rates may have on the 
present value of the Group’s pension obligations, the effects of which are set out in Note 24.

Sterling 
1.0% increase in rates
1.0% decrease in rates

2018

Effect 
on profit 
before tax 
£m

(0.6)
0.6

Effect  
on equity 
£m

(0.6)
0.6

2017

Effect 
on profit 
before tax 
£m

(0.4)
0.4

Effect  
on equity 
£m

(0.4)
0.4

The methods and assumptions used to calculate the possible effect of a change in interest rates are consistent with those used in the prior year. 

Currency risk and sensitivity 
The Group is a largely UK based business with a small proportion of the Group’s activities denominated in euro. The only non-sterling activity 
is in Ireland. In order to protect the sterling value of the balance sheet, the Group finances its investment in Ireland by borrowing in euro. 
Transactional exposure is minimal as the vast majority of transactions are denominated in euro, the relevant functional currency of the operation.

Operational foreign exchange risk, where purchases or sales are made in non functional currency, is hedged on an ad hoc basis by buying or selling 
the relevant currency on a forward basis if the amounts involved are material.

Credit risk
Credit risk is the risk of financial loss to the Group if a customer or counterparty to a financial instrument fails to meet its contractual obligations, 
and arises principally from the Group’s receivables from customers.

The Group has a credit policy in place and the exposure to credit risk is monitored on an ongoing basis. Deposits are only made with pre-approved 
counterparties. Credit evaluations are performed on all customers requiring credit. The Group does not generally require collateral in respect of 
financial assets. At the balance sheet date there were no significant concentrations of credit risk. The maximum exposure to credit risk is represented 
by the carrying amount of each financial asset, including derivative financial instruments, in the balance sheet of £98.4m (2017: £128.1m).  
See Note 15 for further analysis of trade receivables and the associated doubtful debt provisions held.

Capital risk management
The Group’s objectives when managing capital are to safeguard its ability to continue as a going concern, in order to provide optimal returns for 
shareholders, and to maintain an efficient capital structure. The capital structure of the Group consists of net debt (as shown above) and equity of the 
Group (issued share capital, reserves and retained earnings).

In doing so, the Group’s strategy is to retain appropriate levels of liquidity headroom to ensure financial stability and flexibility. To achieve this 
strategy and maintain this position, the Group regularly monitors key credit metrics such as net debt to EBITDA, interest cover and fixed charge cover. 
In addition the Group ensures a combination of short term liquidity headroom with a diverse long term debt maturity profile. As at the balance sheet 
date the Group’s average debt maturity profile was 4.5 years. 

In order to maintain or realign the capital structure, the Group may adjust the amount of dividends paid to shareholders, return capital to shareholders, 
issue new shares, or sell assets to reduce debt.

98

AccountsWincanton plc Annual Report and Accounts 201826. FINANCIAL INSTRUMENTS (CONTINUED)

Fair values
The fair values of the Group’s financial assets and liabilities, together with the carrying amounts shown in the balance sheet are given in the 
following table: 

Trade receivables
Other receivables
Cash and cash equivalents
Forward exchange contracts
Interest rate swaps
Bank loans and overdrafts
Trade and other payables
Unrecognised losses

2018

2017

Carrying amount 
£m
80.3
0.4
17.6
0.1
(0.2)
(47.0)
(183.9)

Fair value 
£m
80.3
0.4
17.6
0.1
(0.2)
(47.0)
(183.9)
–

Carrying amount 
£m
86.3
0.4
40.9
0.5
(0.6)
(65.1)
(188.3)

Fair value 
£m
86.3
0.4
40.9
0.5
(0.6)
(65.1)
(188.3)
–

Estimation of fair values
The following summarises the major methods and assumptions used in estimating the fair values of financial instruments reflected in the above table. 
Under the disclosure requirements of IFRS 13, all fair value measurements of financial assets and liabilities are considered to be categorised as level 2.

Derivatives
The fair value of forward exchange contracts is calculated as the contractual forward price less the current forward rate. The fair value of interest rate 
swaps was determined by discounting the future cash flows at rates determined by year end yield curves.

Interest-bearing loans and borrowings and unsecured bond issues
Fair value is calculated on discounted expected future principal and interest cash flows at market interest rates.

27. RELATED PARTIES

Identity of related parties
The Group has a controlling related party relationship with its parent Company Wincanton plc. In addition the Group has related party relationships 
with its Executive and Non-executive Directors and with its subsidiaries and jointly controlled entities.

Transactions with Executive and Non-executive Directors
The interests of the Executive and Non-executive Directors in the share capital of the Company, plus full details of the individual Directors’ 
emoluments, bonuses deferred in shares, share options and pension entitlements are given in the Annual Report on Remuneration on pages 44 to 51.

The total of short term employee remuneration and benefits receivable by the Directors is set out in Note 4.

99

Strategic reportGovernanceDirectors’ remuneration reportDirectors’ reportIndependent auditor’s reportAccountsWincanton plc Annual Report and Accounts 2018Accounts
AT 31 MARCH 2018

WINCANTON PLC COMPANY BALANCE SHEET

Fixed assets
Investment in subsidiaries

Current assets
Debtors
Cash at bank and in hand

Creditors: amounts falling due within one year
Net current assets
Total assets less current liabilities
Creditors: amounts falling due after more than one year
Net assets

Capital and reserves
Called up share capital
Share premium account
Hedging reserve
Profit and loss account
Equity shareholders’ funds

Note

2

3

4

5

7

2018 
£m

108.9
108.9

85.8
8.6
94.4
(31.2)
63.2
172.1
(47.1)
125.0

12.5
12.9
(0.1)
99.7
125.0

2017 
£m

108.9
108.9

84.5
2.3
86.8
(12.8)
74.0
182.9
(65.0)
117.9

12.4
12.9
(0.1)
92.7
117.9

The Company reported a profit for the year ended 31 March 2018 of £22.8m (2017: £24.0m).

The financial statements were approved by the Board of Directors and authorised for issue on 16 May 2018 and were signed on their behalf by:

A Colman 
Chief Executive Officer 

Company Registration  
Number: 04178808

T Lawlor
Chief Financial Officer

100

Wincanton plc Annual Report and Accounts 2018Accounts
FOR THE YEAR ENDED 31 MARCH 2018

WINCANTON PLC COMPANY STATEMENT OF CHANGES IN EQUITY

Balance at 1 April 2016

Profit for the year
Other comprehensive income
Total comprehensive income

Share based payment transactions
Current tax on share based payment transactions
Deferred tax on share based payment transactions
Own shares acquired
Dividends received
Dividends paid to shareholders
Balance at 31 March 2017

Profit and loss account

Share  
capital 
£m
12.4

Share  
premium 
£m
12.9

Hedging
reserve
£m
(0.8)

Reserve for 
own shares
£m
(3.1)

Retained 
earnings
£m
81.5

–
–
–

–
–
–
–
–
–
12.4

–
–
–

–
–
–
–
–
–
12.9

–
0.7
0.7

–
–
–
–
–
–
(0.1)

–
–
–

2.7
–
–
(0.1)
–
–
(0.5)

24.0
–
24.0

(4.4)
1.1
(0.1)
–
1.5
(10.4)
93.2

Total 
equity
£m
102.9

24.0
0.7
24.7

(1.7)
1.1
(0.1)
(0.1)
1.5
(10.4)
117.9

Balance at 1 April 2017

12.4

12.9

(0.1)

(0.5)

93.2

117.9

Profit for the year
Other comprehensive income
Total comprehensive income

Share based payment transactions
Current tax on share based payment transactions
Shares issued
Own shares acquired
Dividends paid to shareholders
Balance at 31 March 2018

–
–
–

–
–
0.1
–
–
12.5

–
–
–

–
–
–
–
–
12.9

–
–
–

–
–
–
–
–
(0.1)

–
–
–

0.7
–
(0.1)
(2.1)
–
(2.0)

22.8
–
22.8

(2.8)
0.1
–
–
(11.6)
101.7

22.8
–
22.8

(2.1)
0.1
–
(2.1)
(11.6)
125.0

101

Strategic reportGovernanceDirectors’ remuneration reportDirectors’ reportIndependent auditor’s reportAccountsWincanton plc Annual Report and Accounts 2018NOTES TO THE WINCANTON PLC COMPANY FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

1. ACCOUNTING POLICIES

The following accounting policies have been applied consistently in dealing with items which are considered material in relation to the Company’s 
financial statements.

Basis of preparation
The separate financial statements of the Company are presented as required by the Companies Act 2006. The Company meets the definition of 
a qualifying entity under Financial Reporting Standard 100 (FRS 100) issued by the Financial Reporting Council. Accordingly, the financial statements 
have been prepared in accordance with Financial Reporting Standard 101 Reduced Disclosure Framework (FRS 101).

Under Section 408(4) of the Companies Act 2006, the Company is exempt from the requirement to present its own profit and loss account.  
The profit attributable to the Company is disclosed in the footnote to the Company’s balance sheet.

As permitted by FRS 101, the Company has taken advantage of the disclosure exemptions available under that standard in relation to share based 
payments, financial instruments, capital management, presentation of comparative information in respect of certain assets, presentation of a cash 
flow statement and certain related party transactions. Where required, equivalent disclosures are given in the consolidated financial statements.

The financial statements have been prepared on the historical cost basis except for the remeasurement of certain financial instruments to fair value. 
The principal accounting policies adopted are the same as those set out in Note 1 to the consolidated financial statements except as noted below.

Investments
Investments in subsidiaries are stated at cost and reviewed for impairment if there are indications that the carrying values may not be recoverable.

2. INVESTMENT IN SUBSIDIARIES

Shares in Group undertakings
Cost at beginning and end of year

A list of the subsidiaries of Wincanton plc is given in Note 11 to the consolidated financial statements. 

3. DEBTORS

Amounts owed by Group undertakings
Prepayments and accrued income
Deferred tax

All debtors are due within one year, except prepayments and accrued income of £0.2m (2017: £0.6m).

4. CREDITORS: AMOUNTS FALLING DUE WITHIN ONE YEAR

Bank loans and overdrafts
Amounts owed to Group undertakings
Other financial liabilities
Accruals and deferred income

Details of bank loans and overdrafts are given in Note 18 to the consolidated financial statements.

2018 
£m
108.9

2017 
£m
108.9

2018 
£m
84.7
0.5
0.6
85.8

2018 
£m
18.5
6.4
--
6.3
31.2

2017 
£m
82.4
0.8
1.3
84.5

2017 
£m
0.1
7.2
0.1
5.4
12.8

102

AccountsWincanton plc Annual Report and Accounts 20185. CREDITORS: AMOUNTS FALLING DUE AFTER MORE THAN ONE YEAR

Bank loans
Other financial liabilities

Details of bank loans and other financial liabilities are given in Note 18 to the consolidated financial statements.

6. CAPITAL AND RESERVES

Allotted, called up and fully paid
At 1 April
Issued during the year
In issue at 31 March 

2018 
£m
47.0
0.1
47.1

10p Ordinary Shares

2018 
millions
123.7
0.8
124.5

2017 
£m
65.0
–
65.0

2017 
millions
123.7
–
123.7

Details of the Company’s own shares, held within an Employee Benefit Trust, are given in Note 21 to the consolidated financial statements. 
Details of the Company’s equity compensation benefits are given in Note 25 to the consolidated financial statements.

During the year ended 31 March 2002, the Company established a Capital Redemption Reserve of £49,998 on redemption of redeemable 
preference shares. 

As permitted by Section 408 (4) of the Companies Act 2006, the Company has not presented its own profit and loss account. The Directors’ 
remuneration as disclosed in Note 4 to the consolidated financial statements is incurred by Wincanton plc. The Company has taken the exemption 
not to disclose non-audit fees incurred as these are included in Note 3 to the consolidated financial statements. 

7. RECONCILIATION OF MOVEMENT IN SHAREHOLDERS’ FUNDS

Profit for the year
Dividends received
Dividends paid to shareholders
Other recognised gains and losses relating to the year
Current tax on share based payment transactions
Deferred tax on share based payment transactions
Share based payment transactions
Own shares acquired
Net increase in shareholders’ funds
Opening shareholders’ funds
Closing shareholders’ funds

2018 
£m
22.8
–
(11.6)
–
0.1
–
(2.1)
(2.1)
7.1
117.9
125.0

2017 
£m
24.0
1.5
(10.4)
0.7
1.1
(0.1)
(1.7)
(0.1)
15.0
102.9
117.9

103

Strategic reportGovernanceDirectors’ remuneration reportDirectors’ reportIndependent auditor’s reportAccountsWincanton plc Annual Report and Accounts 2018GROUP FIVE YEAR RECORD

AS REPORTED UNDER ADOPTED IFRS

Revenue
Underlying operating profit2
Operating profit
Net financing costs 
Underlying profit before tax2
Profit before tax
Underlying profit after tax for the year2
Underlying earnings per share2
Basic earnings per share
Dividend per share 
Net debt

2018 
£m
1,171.9
52.9
44.4
(6.5)
46.4
37.9
38.1
30.8p
25.2p
9.9p
(29.5)

2017
£m
1,118.1
52.1
56.0
(10.6)
41.5
45.4
34.0
27.7p
34.2p
9.1p
(24.3)

2016
£m
1,147.4
50.9
81.4
(15.6)
35.3
65.8
28.8
23.9p
50.7p
5.5p
(39.5)

2015
£m
1,107.4
49.7
43.2
(18.3)
31.4
24.9
24.5
21.1p
16.6p
–
(57.6)

2014
restated1
£m
1,098.0
48.0
57.3
(22.4)
25.6
34.9
19.3
16.6p
23.6p
–
(64.9)

1  Where applicable, amounts have been restated for the change in accounting for joint ventures.
2  Operating profit, and hence profit before and after tax are reported on an underlying basis, ie including, where applicable, share of results of associates but before amortisation  
of acquired intangibles, any impairment of goodwill and acquired intangibles, exceptional items, tax relating to these items and exceptional tax. Underlying earnings per share  
is calculated on the same basis.

104

Additional informationWincanton plc Annual Report and Accounts 2018SHAREHOLDER INFORMATION

FINANCIAL CALENDAR

Annual General Meeting

To be held on 28 June 2018 at the offices of 
Buchanan Communications, 107 Cheapside, 
London EC2V 6DN at 11am

Interim results for 2018/19 Interim announcement November 2018
Full year results for 2018/19 Preliminary announcement May 2019
Annual Report

Posted to shareholders in May 2019

Annual Report
Copies can be obtained from the Company’s address below.

Shareholder enquiries
The Company’s Registrar is Computershare. If you have any questions 
about your holding or wish to notify any change in your details, please 
contact the Registrar at: 

Computershare Investor Services plc  
The Pavilions, Bridgwater Road, Bristol BS99 6ZZ  
Telephone: 0370 702 0000. 

Whenever you contact the Registrar, please quote the full name(s) 
in which your shares are held. 

Dividends
Dividends are normally paid twice per year. The final dividend in respect 
of year ended 31 March 2018 will be payable, if approved, on 3 August 
2018 to those shareholders on the register on 6 July 2018.

The Company encourages its shareholders to have dividends paid 
directly into their bank or building society account. To set this up for 
the shares you hold, you should contact the Registrar for a dividend 
mandate form.

Share dealing service
Wincanton shares may be dealt through the Company’s brokers. 
If you would like further information, you may contact the brokers at: 
Corporate Broking, Numis Securities Ltd, the London Stock Exchange 
Building, 10 Paternoster Square, London, EC4M 7LT. Telephone number 
020 7260 1000. Alternatively please contact your bank, building society 
or stockbroker who will be able to assist you in dealing in your shares.

Share price quotation
The Company’s share price is quoted via the Wincanton website, where 
it is regularly updated through the day.

Shareholders’ enquiries
If you have an enquiry about the Company’s business or about 
something affecting you as a shareholder (other than queries regarding 
shareholdings which are dealt with by Computershare) you are invited 
to contact the Company at the address below.

Unsolicited mail
The Company is obliged to make its Register available to other 
organisations. Shareholders wishing to limit the amount of unsolicited 
mail they may receive as a result should contact the Mailing Preference 
Service at: 

DMA House, 70 Margaret Street, London W1W 8SS  
or online at www.mpsonline.org.uk 

Unsolicited investment advice
Shareholders are advised to be wary of unsolicited mail or telephone 
calls offering free advice, to buy shares at a discount or offering free 
company reports.

If you receive any unsolicited investment advice:

 • make sure you confirm the correct name of the person 

and organisation

 • check that they are properly authorised by the FCA by calling 

0800 111 6768 or by visiting www.fca.org.uk/register, and 
then contacting the firm using the details on the register

 • report the matter to the FCA either by calling 0800 111 6768 or visiting 

www.fca.org.uk/consumers

 • report suspected fraud and internet crime to the police through 
Action Fraud, which you can contact on 0300 123 2040 or visiting 
www.actionfraud.police.uk
 • if the calls persist, hang up
 • inform Computershare’s Compliance Department

If you deal with an unauthorised firm, you will not be eligible to receive 
payments under the Financial Services Compensation Scheme. If you 
have already paid money to share fraudsters, you should contact Action 
Fraud on 0300 123 2040.

More detailed information on this or similar activity can be found 
on the FCA website www.fca.org.uk/consumers/scams

ShareGift
If you hold only a few shares and feel that it would be uneconomical 
or simply not worthwhile to sell them, you could consider donating 
your shares to charity through ShareGift (registered charity 1052686). 
Donated shares are aggregated and sold by ShareGift, the proceeds 
being passed on to a wide range of UK charities. To find out more 
visit www.sharegift.org or call 020 7930 3737. Alternatively contact the 
Company’s Registrar who can help arrange the transfer of your shares.

Wincanton plc website
The Wincanton website at www.wincanton.co.uk provides news and 
information about the services offered by Wincanton as well as useful 
information for investors.

Forward-looking statements
These Annual Report and Accounts and Wincanton’s website 
may contain certain ‘forward-looking statements’ with respect to 
Wincanton plc and the Group’s financial condition, results of operations 
and business, and certain of Wincanton plc’s and the Group’s plans, 
objectives, goals and expectations with respect to these items.

Forward-looking statements are sometimes, but not always, identified 
by their use of a date in the future or such words as ‘anticipates’, ‘aims’, 
‘due’, ‘could’, ‘may’, ‘should’, ‘expects’, ‘believes’, ‘intends’, ‘plans’, ‘targets’, 
‘goal’ or ‘estimates’. By their very nature forward-looking statements are 
inherently unpredictable, speculative and involve risk and uncertainty 
because they relate to events and depend on circumstances that will 
occur in the future. Many of these assumptions, risks and uncertainties 
relate to factors that are beyond the Group’s ability to control or estimate 
precisely. There are a number of such factors that could cause actual 
results and developments to differ materially from those expressed or 
implied by these forward-looking statements. These factors include, 
but are not limited to, changes in the economies and markets in which 
the Group operates; changes in the legal, regulatory and competition 
frameworks in which the Group operates; changes in the markets from 
which the Group raises finance; the impact of legal or other proceedings 
against or which affect the Group; changes in accounting practices 
and interpretation of accounting standards under IFRS, and changes 
in interest and exchange rates.

Any written or verbal forward-looking statements, made in our Annual 
Report and Accounts or on Wincanton’s website or made subsequently, 
which are attributable to Wincanton plc or any other member of the 
Group or persons acting on their behalf are expressly qualified in their 
entirety by the factors referred to above. Each forward-looking statement 
speaks only as of the date of our Annual Report and Accounts, or on the 
date the forward-looking statement is made. Wincanton plc does not 
intend to update any forward-looking statements.

105

Strategic reportGovernanceDirectors’ remuneration reportDirectors’ reportIndependent auditor’s reportAccountsAdditional informationWincanton plc Annual Report and Accounts 2018DIRECTORS AND ADVISERS

BOARD OF DIRECTORS AND ADVISERS

Non-executive Directors
Stewart Oades (Interim Chairman)  
Paul Dean  
David Radcliffe  
Martin Sawkins  
Gill Barr

Executive Directors

Adrian Colman (Chief Executive Officer)  
Tim Lawlor (Chief Financial Officer)

Secretary and registered office
R Sharma 
Wincanton plc  
Methuen Park 
Chippenham 
Wiltshire 
SN14 0WT

Tel +44 (0)1249 71 00 00

Registered in England & Wales under No. 04178808

Auditors
KPMG LLP  
66 Queen Square  
Bristol  
BS1 4BE

Brokers 
Numis Securities Limited  
The London Stock Exchange Building  
10 Paternoster Square  
London  
EC4M 7LT

Company’s Legal Advisers
DWF  
Registered office:  
1 Scott Place  
2 Hardman Street  
Manchester  
M3 3AA

Registered number: OC328794

Eversheds  
Registered office:  
1 Wood Street  
London  
EC2V 7WS

Registered number: OC304065

Clarks Legal  
Registered office:  
One Forbury Square  
The Forbury  
Reading  
Berkshire  
RG1 3EB

Registered number: OC308349

Clyde and Co  
Registered office:  
The St. Botolph Building  
138 Houndsditch  
London  
EC3A 7AR

Registered number: OC326539

Share registrar 
Computershare Investor Services plc  
The Pavilions  
Bridgwater Road  
Bristol  
BS99 6ZZ 

106

Additional informationWincanton plc Annual Report and Accounts 2018Design and production  
Radley Yeldar www.ry.com

The paper used in this report is produced using virgin wood fibre from well‑managed forests with FSC© certification. 
All pulps used are elemental chlorine free and manufactured at a mill that has been awarded the ISO 14001 and 
EMAS certificates for environmental management. The use of the FSC© logo identifies products which contain  
wood from well‑managed forests certified in accordance with the rules of the Forest Stewardship Council.

Printed by CPI Colour, an FSC© and ISO 14001 accredited company, who is committed to all round excellence  
and improving environmental performance as an important part of this strategy.

WINCANTON.CO.UK

Wincanton plc

Methuen Park  
Chippenham 
Wiltshire SN14 0WT 
United Kingdom

Registered in England & 
Wales under No. 4178808

Tel +44 (0)1249 71 00 00 
Fax +44 (0)1249 71 00 01